Home

Samsung SCX-8230NA multifunctional

1. Troubleshooting_ 203 4 Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path iH Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover S 5 Close the DADF input tray and the DADF cover Load the removed pages back into the DADF Troubleshooting 204 4 Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF 6 Open the DADF jam cover 7 Grasp the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by l carefully pulling it using both hands Close the duplex jam cover and the DADF cover Load the removed pages back into the DADF If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 5 Open the DADF 8 Close the DADF jam cover and the DADF Load the removed pages back into the DADF Troubleshooting 205 4 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF If the jammed paper is not easily removed go to the next step 5 Open the DADF Original paper jam in exit area of scanner K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Open the DADF
2. Status Description Off The machine is not in power save mode Blue On The machine is in power save mode Understanding the pop up keyboard You can enter alphabet characters numbers or special symbols using the pop up keyboard on the display screen This keyboard is the same as a normal keyboard for easy usability Touch the input area where you need to enter characters then the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters ae e BE D 6 Sy TC TI inom paa TIL Or Ok Cancel t y u i 0 b n 1 Arrow Moves the cursor between characters in the input area 2 Backspace Deletes the characters on the left side of the p cursor G Del Deletes the characters on the right side of the cursor 4 C Deletes all characters in the input area 5 Input area Enters letters within this line 6 Shift Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa Symbols Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbol keyboard Space Enters a blank between characters 9 OK Saves and closes input result Cancel Cancels and closes input result Introduction_ 32 Using the manual stapler 3 The first page of the printed documents should face the bottom Insert the documents into the manual stapler so that the upper right part of the documents will be st
3. Item Requirements higher Operating Sun Solaris 8 9 10 x86 SPARC e You can install the XPS printer driver when you insert the software system IBM AIX 5 x CD into your CD ROM drive When the installation window appears select Advanced Installation gt Custom Installation HP UX 11i PA RISC Itanium You can select the XPS printer driver in the Select Software and Free HDD space Up to 100 MB Introducing useful software programs Utilities to Install window Feature Windows Samsung Anyweb Print This tool helps you to screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Click Start 5 All programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Samsung AnyWeb Print 5 Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download This tool is available only for Windows operating systems Printer driver features Machine quality option Poster printing Multiple pages per sheet Booklet printing Fit to page printing Reduce and enlarge printing Different source for first page Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies You can also use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Cover page options
4. Status Name User When Completed Faxing optional 111 Understanding the fax screen To use the fax feature press Fax on the display screen Z If you want to use this feature you need to install the optional fax kit on your machine If a different screen is displayed press 0 to go to the home display screen Basic tab mar Recent Pause It On Hook Programs Fax Line Resolution d Line p lt 4 Standard b bel Save Document e Fax number input area Enter the recipient s fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel If you configured the address book press Address Book see Setting up an address book using the control panel on page 128 or Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service on page 132 e Add to Address Adds a entered fax number to Address Book Deletes the last digit entered e ic Removes all digits of the selected entry e Fax Line Select a fax line when your machine has multiple fax lines e Resolution Adjusts the resolution options see Changing the resolution on page 120 e Address Book Inputs the recipient s fax number just by pressing stored numbers You can save frequently used fax numbers using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service see Setting up an address book using the control panel on page 128 or Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service on page 132 e Recent Shows the last 10 fax numbers
5. Ul 1 press the left right arrow for previewing the another pages E Rotates the previewed image 90 degrees t C counterclockwise or clockwise Send to Sends the previewed data to specific destination see Sending stored data on page 174 Print Prints the whole pages which is previewed Delete page Deletes the previewed page from the selected out of stored data If the stored data has only one page the stored data will be deleted Back Returns to the previous page Document box_ 171 Adding scanned data You can store a new scanned data direcly from the selected box 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Document Box gt Select a box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 004 9 005 test rele 1 File 0 File Favorite2 Favorite3 003 004 Q m m File 3 File 1 File 006 007 releas vit weekl f O File 1 File O File OF Detal Seach 4 Select r Save Document Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box C 4 File s 1 1 Document Name Page Job Type Date demo3 1 Box 2010 05 11 demo2 1 Box 2010 05 11 Print List demol 1 Box 2010 05 11 2010 05 11 Original Size an File Name Untitled 20100511 1507 o L Color Mode eee 4 Color gt Box Info Common
6. Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 255 COUNTRY REGION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE GREECE IT and Mobile 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 7267864 from land line local charge www samsung com from mobile 210 6897691 Cameras Camcorders Televisions and Household Appliances From mobile and fixed 2106293100 GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com HONDURAS 800 27919267 www samsung com HONG KONG 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_en HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com 1800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com 021 5699 7777 IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com ITALY 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com JORDAN 800 22273 www samsung com KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 GSM 7799 www samsung com KOSOVO 381 0113216899 KUWAIT 183 2255 www samsung com KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung com LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com MACEDONIA 023 207 777 MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www samsung com NIGERIA 080 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG 0900 7267864 0 10 min www samsung com NEW
7. Shows the scanning faxing device ready to Device Name use Search If you cannot see any device ready to use click this button to find a device e K Click Search Now to automatically search for all devices to which you have access Click the Help 2 button from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Using features Scanning 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Click Scan from the home screen Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start SL a PO Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview image Select to Save to Location Send to E mail or Send to SNS 7 Click on Save Saving a Scan Send E mailing a Scan or Share Uploading o Z If there is room on the document glass more than one item can be scanned at the same time Use the By tool to make multiple selection areas Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options Quick Scanning Configuring Quick Scan To set up the Quick Scan options 1 Click Configuration from the home screen 2 Click on Default to use the default settings or select your own options 3 Click Apply to save changes Using Quick Scan 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click Quick Scan from
8. i 9 Enter the name to be added and select the speed dial number in General K e Speed Dial Number is the number representing a recipient s information you can use the numeric keypad on the control panel e Check Favorite for addresses you often use You can easily find them from the search results 10 Enter the email address in E mail 11 Enter the fax number in Fax 12 Check the enable SMB box in SMB You can enter the SMB information when you check it 13 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name in SMB Server Address 14 Enter the server port number in SMB Server Port 15 Enter the login name in Login Name IZ e In case of SMB or FTP if you want the server to permit access for unauthorized person Press the Anonymous box This box is unchecked by default If you checked the Anonymous box go to step 18 e In case of WebDAV you can send the files in encryption checking SSL If the machine and receiving WebDAV server of the SSL Secure Sockets Layer option are different the transfer could be failed Also if the receiving WebDAV server can receive only the encrypted file you need to check the SSL button 16 Enter the password in Password and re enter the password in Confirm Password 17 Enter the domain name in Domain IZ e Incase of WebDav Domain does not appear If the SMB server you entered is not registered any domain leave it blank or enter the computer n
9. Down to Top a LEF meaning is Long Edge Feed b SEF meaning is Short Edge Feed Copying 65 e All other page order options of N up are the same except for the 2Up You can press Right to Down Left to Down Down to Left and Down to Right 7 Press Border to print a border around each page on the sheet e Off Disables this feature e Full Line Prints a full line around each page e Dotted Line Prints a dotted line around each page e Cross Line Prints a cross line around each page 8 Press OK from the display screen 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window Image Repeat This option prints several copies of the original image on the same side of a single page If you have other original in the DADF all other original images get printed the same way IZ e When you use this option N Up Booklet and Book Copy in the Advanced tab are inactivated e When you select Auto Repeat Auto Fit is not available option for the Reduce Enlarge feature e When you select Manual Repeat Reduce Enlarge is not available option in the Basic tab Copies 0001 Advanced mage at Original Size Image Repeat Off Original Print multiple image copies Orientation on a single page ID Copy Auto Repe
10. The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows iY The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using Samsung Easy Printer Manager samang Easy Printer Manager Toner Toner ID 6 Order Supplies Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and network printers added by network discovery Windows only Management tools_ 182 Printer This area gives you general information about your information machine You can check information such as the machine s model name IP address or Port name and machine status 2 You can view the online User s Guide Troubleshooting button This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the necessary section in the user s guide Application Includes links for changing to the advanced information settings preference help and about 3 The az button is used to change the user interface to the advanced settings user interface see Advanced settings user interface overview on page 183 Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions This section also includes links to applications in 4 the advanced settings K If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled Contents area Displays information about the selected ma
11. 10 Press Start from the control panel to begin scanning iY e Scanned image is saved in the computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder e You can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 gt Quick Scan see Scan Assistant on page 106 Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 If you have installed the printer driver from the software CD Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 program should have been installed Start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 to find this program s information and the installed scan driver s condition Through this program you can change scan settings and add or delete folders where scanned documents are saved on your computer Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 program can only be used in Windows operating system If you use the Macintosh See Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager on page 107 1 From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Scan and Fax Manager 2 gt Scan and Fax Manager 2 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager 2 window 3 Press Properties 4 The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the save destination and scan settings add or delete applications program and format files oo Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Series Property 10 88 163 130 SetScanButton Scan Button Scan Destination Available Destination List Front Panel Destination List Des
12. Printing 151 a OF amp mark 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing on both sides of the paper You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can only use this feature with Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 ISO B5 JIS B5 Statement Executive A5 8K 16K Ledger Tabloid Extra A3 or JIS B4 sized paper Z e When you use this feature with the Right Tray as an output tray see Output Tray Options on page 145 it could slow down the printing speed We recommend you to use other trays for an output tray e Do not print on both sides of the special media such as labels envelopes or thick paper to print on both sides of paper It may Cause a paper jam or damage the machine 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Basic tab 3 From the Double Sided Printing section select the binding option you want e Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver e None Disables this feature e Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding ae IBU a IT WTI e Short Edge This option is the conventional layout used
13. Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness level of scan outputs see Changing Sharpness on page 100 Contrast Adjusts the contrast level of scan outputs see Changing Contrast on page 100 Back Returns to the Basic tab Ajust Background Erases the background to some extent by adjusting density or brightness see Adjusting background on page 100 Erase Backside Image Prevents scanning the other side s image shown through the original paper see Erasing backside Images on page 101 Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge see Scan to Edge on page 101 Back Returns to the Basic tab Scanning 88 Quality Normal Scan Preset Custom Fa File Format POF Preview Programs 1 1 M Back Save Document Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scanned output see Quality on page 101 Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format and resolution You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose see Scan Preset on page 101 File Format Selects the file format of the scanned output see File Format on page 102 Back Returns to the Basic tab Scanning and sending to SMB WEBDAV FTP server You can select up to four destinations using SMB WEBDAV or FTP servers 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Server from the disp
14. Too much media in the center tray Remove printed media The center tray is full Remove printouts from the center tray the machine resumes printing Second fax modem card is not installed Install the card The second optional fax multiline kit is not installed Install the optional fax multiline kit If it is already installed try to reinstall the optional fax multiline kit If the problem persists call for service Too much media in booklet tray Remove printed media The booklet tray is full Remove printouts from the booklet tray the machine resumes printing Shake color toner cartridge Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 183 Too much media in finisher tray Remove printed media The finishing tray is full Remove printouts from the finishing tray the machine resumes printing Top door of scanner is open The duplex automatic document feeder cover is not securely latched Close the cover until it locks into place Troubleshooting 239 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Transfer belt cleaning unit is worn Replace with new one The life of the transfer belt cleaning unit expires totally Replace the transfer belt cleaning unit with a Samsung genuine transfer belt
15. You can move to next or previous page using up down arrows on the bottom left Copies 000 1 Original Type Text amp Printed Photo Erase Edge Off Sharpness Level 5 Contrast Level 5 Mirror Off Programs 1 2 v K Back m Save Document e Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the original s type for the current copy job see Selecting the type of originals on page 74 e Erase Edge Allows you to erase specified areas of copies see Erasing edges on page 75 e Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness level to make a copy that is easier to read see Changing the sharpness on page 75 e Contrast Adjusts the contrast level to make the image either soft or crisp see Changing the contrast on page 76 e Mirror Reverses the original image like a mirror see Copying in a mirror image on page 76 e Back Returns to the Basic tab e Adjust Background Prints an image with a lighter background see Adjusting background on page 77 e Erase Backside Image Prevents copying the original s image shown through on the backside see Erasing backside Images on page 77 e Negative Image Allows you to copy the original image with the light and dark colored areas of the image inversed see Copying ina negative image on page 78 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Copying_ 51 Basic copy 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad on the control panel if necessary Thi
16. pa N e Original Size Selects the size of originals see Selecting the size of originals on page 96 Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals see Selecting the orientation of originals on page 97 Delay Send Sets the machine to send a scanned image at a later time without your intervention see Delaying a scanned image transmission on page 97 Book Scan Allows you to send a scanned file of book or catalog to the server see Book scanning on page 98 Build Job Allows you to scan several pages or different types of originals into a file for sending see Build job on page 98 Back Returns to the Basic tab Job Completion Notification Sends an email notification after the scan to server job is completed see Setting job completion notification on page 98 Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab Output tab You can move to next or previous pages using the up down arrows MB Read located at the bottom left G Original Type Text Color Mode Auto Darkness Level 5 Sharpness Level 5 Preview Contrast Level 5 Programs 1 2 wv K Back bl Save Document se NP Maan APA Original Type Selects whether the original is text photo etc see Selecting the type of originals on page 99 Color Mode Adjusts the color options of scan outputs see Selecting the color mode on page 99 Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of scan outputs see Changing Darkness on page 100
17. 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Programs Fax Line Resolution Line gt lt 4 Standard p Save Document kan laa annaa paesan iesnas 4 Press Programs 5 Press a previous setting you want to use For example if you want to use the settings from the last job press Previous1 Previous Previous2 Previous3 Previous4 List E Set Value Set Value Original Type Text Color Mode Mono Onginal Size Auto Darkness 5 Duplex 1 Sided Resolution Standard pel NARE SESS Nagmana 6 Press OK 7 Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to fax according to the setting you selected 8 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations iH e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop on the control panel before the machine start transmission Or press the Job Status button on the control panel and select the job you want to delete press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the w
18. 140 Print Mode 141 Basic tab 142 Paper tab 143 Graphics tab 145 Finishing tab 146 Advanced tab 147 Eco tab 147 Samsung tab 148 Using a favorite setting 148 Using help 149 Setting Device Options 151 Using special print features 151 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 151 Printing posters 151 Printing booklets 152 Printing on both sides of the paper 152 Change the size by percentage of your document 152 Fitting your document to a selected paper size 152 Using watermarks 153 Using overlay 154 Banner Printing 155 Using direct printing utility 155 What is Direct Printing Utility 155 Printing 155 Using the right click menu 155 Changing the default print settings 156 Setting your machine as a default machine 156 Printing to a file PRN Contents_ 7 contents 157 157 157 160 160 161 161 161 161 162 162 162 USING A USB MEMORY DEVICE 164 164 165 166 166 166 166 DOCUMENT BOX 167 MANAGEMENT TOOLS 182 182 182 182 182 183 183 183 184 184 185 186 Contents Macintosh printing Printing a document Activating optional devices or accessories Changing printer settings Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper Printing on both sides of paper Linux printing Printing from applications Printing files Configuring Printer Properties UNIX Printing Proceeding the print job Changing the printer settings Understanding the USB screen About USB memory device Printing f
19. 6 Folder s 1 2 Pages Trashes mage Trashes Sootiat moy wa e Book Scan Allows you to send a book or catalog as an email attachment see Book scanning on page 98 8a te eee Ella lDobip kaan e Build Job Allows you to scan several pages or different types of Ba originals into a file for sending see Build job on page 98 Pr a Duplex Resolution ba e Back Returns to the Basic tab d 1 Sided b 4 300 dpi b bel Save Document a Image tab You can move to next or previous pages using the up down arrows e _ Moves back to the upper level located at the bottom lefi e Select Moves to the selected folder e New folder Makes a new folder in the USB memory device e Detail Displays information of the selected folder or file e Edit Changes the name of the selected folder or file e Delete Deletes the selected folder or file Orignal Type Text e File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data ies i Ea e Duplex Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided Book or both sides of the Darkness Level 5 paper 2 Sided Calendar see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 Shapness gali Level 5 _ Preview e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value see Changing sasang a the resolution on page 96 AUE e Preview Allows you to see a preview image before scanning see 1 2 w K Back kr Save Doc
20. Advanced Original Size Off Both pages From Book Scan Original Left Scan entire book Orientation dividing left and right pages Ne Pe Both pages From Delay Send Left Page Right Book Scan Right Page Build Job 1 2 low Sai X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Scans only the left page of the book e Right Page Scans only the right page of the book e Both Pages From Left Scans both facing pages from the left page e Both Pages From Right Scans both facing pages from the right page 3 Press OK from the display screen Build job This feature allows you to scan and send originals which are consist of multiple batches or different sizes at once After scanning the originals the originals are sent as one document to entered destinations 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email or Scan to Server from the display screen Enter the destinations information 4 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 5 Set scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 6 Press the Advanced tab gt Build Job from the display screen p
21. Average continuous black cartridge yield 25 000 standard pages CLT K606S Black Region AP CLT K6062S Black Average continuous colored cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Cyan Magenta Yellow CLT C606S Cyan CLT M606S Magenta CLT Y606S Yellow Region AP CLT C6062S Cyan CLT M6062S Magenta CLT Y6062S Yellow Average continuous colored cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages Cyan Magenta Y ellow CLT C607S Cyan CLT M607S Magenta CLT Y607S Yellow Region AP CLT C6072S Cyan CLT M6072S Magenta CLT Y6072S Yellow l4 If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Troubleshooting_ 189 a Declared yield value in accordance with 5 coverage b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxemburg Macedonia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK Model Average yield Part name SCX 8230 Average continuous black MLT K607S Series cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous black MLT K606S cartridge yield 35 000 Korea USA only standard pages SCX 8240 Average continuous black MLT K607S Series cartridge yield 20 000 standard pages Average continuous black MLT K606S cartridge yield 35 000
22. Create professional documents e Print Posters The texts and pictures of each page of your document are magpnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster see Printing posters on page 151 e Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential see Using watermarks on page 152 e You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper see Using overlay on page 153 Save time and money e To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper see Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 151 e This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use e To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing see Printing on both sides of the paper on page 152 Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand its memory see Supplies and Accessories e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 PS enables PS printing Z RAN Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136 PS3 fonts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc aq Print in various environments e You can print on various
23. Document box 167 Box setting To use Document Box you need to create a new box first in the Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Box Setting You can also edit or delete the created boxes l4 e The Box Setting option can only be configured by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine When the machine requests enter the ID and password e You can create up to 999 boxes e The length of a box name is limited to a maximum 30 characters e A box can contain up to 200 stored documents e Common box is already created by default ex New Box Creates a new box e Edit Box Edits a created box e Delete Box Deletes a created box New Box You can create a new box to store your scanned data 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Box Setting gt New Box from the display screen Box Document Box Untitled9 New Box Box Property Public Secured Edit Box Auto Document Delete Iday 2days 3days 7days 30days PANAHANAN PASMABAA ANAN PEE Delete Box Favorite Box Favorite Favorite2 Favorites maa Aa Ee w OK X Cancel 2 Press the box name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the box name Then press OK IZ e Box number is automatically filled with the first free number e If you do not enter the box name the machine assigns the box name as Untitledxxx The xxx number is the box number 3 Press an appropriate option
24. Position Select the position of staples among Left Right and Top When you use the staple and punch together you can only set the same position for staples and punch holes 1 Staple Left paan a lt lt Ls 2 Staple Right 2 Staple Top 2 Staple Left a IT a is 1 Staple Right e Hole Punch Options This option allows you to specify the number of hole punches and the hole punching position Holes are punched in the printouts for filing them This option is available only when the optional punch kit is installed in the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher Hole Punch Select the number of hole punches between 2 Hole and 3 Hole Depending on the punch kit 4 Hole would appear instead of 3 Hole Position Select the position of hole punches among Left Right and Top When you use the staple and punch together you can only set the same position for staples and punch holes 2 Hole Left 2 Hole Right 2 Hole Top am 3 Hole Left 3 Hole Right lt p e Output Tray Options This option allows you to specify the tray where to output the printed documents Printing 145 Advanced tab Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options Click the Advanced tab to display the options shown below 2 Printing Preferences Samsung Paper gt Device Print Mode A4 Cmm Watermark 210x297mm inch
25. Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in to the machine 6 Click Login iH If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out 7 Click Box Select the box you want to delete 9 Click Delete Box Click OK when the confirmation window appears oo Searching a document box 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Document box 179 9 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows if If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login iY If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out Click Box Enter the document box name you want to search in the search input area Click Q The search result appears Using a document box 1 2 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows K If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner
26. e Forms should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality Glossy iH Load a piece paper into the multi purpose tray at a time glossy side facing down e Recommend media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A only e Recommend media Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product Q6616A only Tray setting After loading paper in the paper tray set the paper size and type using the display screen For computer printing select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your computer see Opening printing preferences on page 140 i The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the display screen Setting the paper size 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt select the tray you want from the display screen Auto Continue gt Paper Tray 2 MP Tray Substitution Tray Priority Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Setting 2 Press Paper Size and select the paper size 139 305 mm ee m ALD ASD Paper Size aaa ir amp 097 1 2 Kg 4D 4D reper Type 210 457mm K 8s B4 w 210 A Tray Confirmation Message Custom size BD B545
27. see Scanning with TWAIN enabled software on page 107 e SmarThru Office This program is accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents This feature can be used via a network connection e Email You can send the scanned image as an email attachment see Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email on page 83 e Server You can scan an image and send it to a server such as FTP WEBDAV or SMB see Scanning originals and sending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server on page 87 e USB You can scan an image and store it to a USB memory device see Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB on page 93 e Changing the scan feature settings e Using a programs setting e Saving documents e Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC e Scanning with TWAIN enabled software e Macintosh scanning e Linux scanning Understanding the scan methods To use the scanning feature press Scan to Email Scan to USB Scan to Server or Scan to PC on the display screen If a different screen is displayed press Q to go to the home display screen e Scan to Email Scans and sends scanned output to the destination by e mail see Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email on page 83 e Scan to Server Scans and sends scanned output to the destination with SMB WEBDAV or FTP See Scanning originals and s
28. 4 Print header and footer pasa lol pinag rorw Supplies A Low Cancel print Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the drop down list Printer 10 88 181 197 ka a Presets Standard a Copies i M Collated C Two Sided Pages All O From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 H 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation B7 Layout H Pages per Sheet 1 B Layout Direction Z2 S A N Border None A Two Sided Off B Reverse Page Orientation aa a lofi gt gt gt POF v POF v Supplies Low Cancel C Print e Pages per Sheet This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page see Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 160 e Layout Direction This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI e Border This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet e Two Sided This option allows you to print on both sides of a paper see Printing on both sides of paper on page 160 e Reverse Page Orientation This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees Printing 157 Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Quality Select Graphics from the drop down list Printer 10 88 181 197 ka fa Presets Standard
29. Advanced Original Size H Original Orientation Delay Send On Book Scan Build Job 1 2 v SY OK X Cancel pa 7 Press On to activate this feature Press OK from the display screen 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning After the scanning the machine shows the window asking to place another page Load another original and press Yes You can change the scan setting pressing Change Settings if necessary When you finish select No on this window The machine sends the file to destinations pa Setting job completion notification When the scan to email or scan to server job is completed this machine can send the completion notification using an email This feature helps when you scan and send with large quantities of documents You do not need to wait until the scan to email or scan to server job is completed beside the machine Scanning_ 98 4 To recieve the job completion notification you need to set up network parameters and email settings using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For details about how to set up the network parameters and email settings refer to the Administrator s Guide on the supplied CD Advanced Job Completion Notification Off Email Address BatesNumbering ee On Address m Book X Cancel 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading origin
30. Bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond Color 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib color backgrounded paper Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib label Transparency 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib transparency paper Envelope 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib envelope Preprinted 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib preprinted paper Cotton 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib cotton paper such as Gilbert 25 and Gilbert 100 Recycled 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib recycled paper Archive 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib If you need to keep the print out for a long period time such as archives select this option Letterhead 90 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib letterhead paper Punched 90 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib punched paper Thin Cardstock 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib cardstock Thick Cardstock 170 to 216 g m 45 to 57 Ib cardstock Thin Glossy 106 to 169 g m 28 to 45 Ib thin glossy Thick Glossy 170 to 253 g m 45 to 67 Ib thick glossy e Special Pages This option is allows you to make special pages such as covers You can add delete or update the special page settings to the list This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Transparency Separator Allows you to add a blank or printed seperator between transparencies This option is available only when you select Transparency in Type e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Printed Separator Places the
31. Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Glossary_ 259 Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A
32. Job Accounting nj User permission O Group permission User ID tech writer Gesie 1of1 PT Enter Password 4 32 Alphanumeric Confirm Password 4 32 Alphanumeric Pore Coppie A tow Pre e User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job e Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job iY e If you want to encrypt job accounting password refer to help on the bottom left corner of the printer properties pane e Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For the detailed information about them refer to the Administrator s Guide Job Setting This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using the hard disk drive in your machine This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD in your machine e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal Normal This mode prints without storing your document Printer 10 88 181 197 iH fa Presets Standard B Copies 1 Collated C Two Sided Pages MAL 5 OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 NG 20 99 by 29 70 em Orientation LO NG Job Setting aj Print Mode Normal e Na as lofi k User ID tech writer A z 0 9 Job Name Untitled A z 0 9 SAMSUNG 7 ED Di Cara me Confidential This mode is used f
33. Margin Shift y Off Create binding edge for the Booklet document Book Copy Auto Center Covers Custom Margin Transparency a 2 419 Veal i X Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Image Shift from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Center Automatically position at the center of the paper e Custom Margin You can adjust the margin of the paper Top amp Bottom Adjusts the margin of the top or bottom of the paper using arrows Left amp Right Adjusts the margin of the left or right of the paper using arrows 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying_ 67 Booklet copying The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all the pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper Z e When you use this option Original Orientation N Up Image Repeat Book Copy Covers WaterMark and St
34. Meaning of status on page 31 e Job Name Displays the name of the job e User Displays the name of the job owner e Detail Displays detailed information of selected job e Close Closes the job status window Introduction 30 Active Notice Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred Copies 0001 03 Result s 1 1 Pages No Machine Status Message Error Code 1 Front door is open Close it 52 4210 2 fight door is open Close it 152 441 0 52 481 0 3 Option feed cover is open Close it e No Gives the order of messages e Machine Status Message Displays the error message for the current errors in the machine e Error Code Displays the error message s code e Detail Displays detailed information of the selected job e Close Closes the job status window Secured Job Displays the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver see Confidential on page 140 You need to enter the User ID and Password set in the printer driver see Confidential on page 140 Copies 0001 men AQ Secured Job 01 Result s No Job Type Job Name Host Print Ch 9x50 guide english 004heywoo Edit Delete e No Gives the order of jobs e Job Type Displays type of the job e Job Name Displays the name of the job e User Displays the name of the job owner e Detail Displays detailed information of the selected job You can
35. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Close the finisher top door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to main bin i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher top door 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Close the finisher top door Troubleshooting 224 position 5 Put the top tray back in the origina aati NI EN nd close the finisher front door Printing automatically resumes Open a 6 Lift up the top tray 3 4 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out II ANN A y a NIYA n e NIT IN II WIN p j lt g A 7 UR Hl Troubleshooting 225 Paper jam inside of finisher bridge 3 Open and close the finisher front door Printing automatically resumes Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Lift up and hold the bridge cover Paper jam at entrance of finisher Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Lift up and hold the bridge cover Troubleshooting 226 If this paper jam persis
36. Rg Network access Shares that can be accessed anonymously COMCFG DFS Rg Network access Sharing and security model For local accounts Classic local users 28 Network security Do not store LAN Manager hash value on next password change Disabled Rg Network security Force logoff when logon hours expire Disabled Rg Network security LAN Manager authentication level Send LM amp NTLM re Rg Network security LDAP client signing requirements Negotiate signing Rg Network security Minimum session security For NTLM SSP based including secure RPC clients No minimum Rg Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including secure RPC servers No minimum Rg Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Disabled Rg Recovery console Allow Floppy copy and access to all drives and all Folders Disabled Rg shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to log on Enabled RS shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile Disabled RS System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms For encryption hashing and signing Disabled ina System objects Default owner For objects created by members of the Administrators group Object creator ing System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows subsystems Enabled ing System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal system objects e g Symbolic Links Enabled 4 Add the shared folder name on Network access Shares that can be accessed anonym
37. Scans one side of an original and prints it on one side of the paper This function produces exactly the same printout from the originals e 1 gt 2 Sided Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper You can select the output binding type either Book or Calendar with the More button Copies 0001 lt Original Binding gt 1 1 Sided 5 Pag 2 2 Sided m 15 1 2 Sided ES lt Output Binding gt SL 2 1 Sided e 2 gt 1 Sided Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate paper You can select the original binding type either Book or Calendar with the More button Copying_ 55 e 2 gt 2 Sided Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper This function produces exactly the same printout from the originals You can select the original and output binding type either Book or Calendar with the More button Selecting the color mode CLX 9252 9352 Series only The machine provides many powerful effects on images without having expert editing skills Press the Basic tab gt Color Mode then select the color mode you want Copies 0001 a Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex to Original 10096 1 1Sided Cc Auto Full Color B W Programs Light Dark ss Output IHI bed Save Document If you press the More button you can see more Color Mode options e Auto Select this setting to autom
38. Transparency seperator option Raster compression Finishing options Output options 6 Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature s in the following table Watermark e Overlay PCL printer driver Double sided printing duplex Feature Windows e Supported Blank Not supported Machine quality option Poster printing 8 Multiple pages per sheet o Booklet printing Fit to page printing o Reduce and enlarge printing Different source for first page G Cover page options Gi Transparency seperator option Raster compression o Finishing options e Output options Watermark Overlay Double sided printing duplex 8 e Supported Blank Not supported Printing 138 PostScript printer driver Feature Windows Macintosh Linux Unix Machine quality option Ce o 6 Poster printing o Multiple pages per sheet o o 2 4 2 4 Booklet printing o 6 Fit to page printing o o e Reduce and enlarge e e printing Cover page options 8 6 o Transparency seperator o 6 option Raster compression Finishing options 6 o o o Output options o e o Watermark o Double sided printing 8 6 8 duplex e Supported Blank Not supported Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applicat
39. already the machine does not create a sub folder e Folder Creation Cycle You can set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine create a sub folder according to this option set io If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name already the machine does not create a sub folder Every Day A sub folder is created every day The sub folder name format is YYYY MM DD e g 2010 01 01 Every Month A sub folder is created every month The sub folder name format is YYYY MM e g 2010 01 Every Year A sub folder is created every year The sub folder name format is YYYY e g 2010 e Create Folder For Multiple Files If you select On in this option and scanned multiple files the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected and the sent files will be stored in the sub folder IZ If all folder creation options are enabled at same time the sent file s will be stored as below e When single scanned file is sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOC jpg e When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg 14 Press OK after entering all the contents You can delete a server address by pressing the delete icon X Resending the latest server address To resend the server address you sent latest 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the
40. colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader Scan and Fax Manager does not work Check your system requirements K Refer to Macintosh User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages Troubleshooting_ 249 specifications This chapter gives information regarding this machine s specifications This chapter include e Hardware specifications e Environmental specifications e Electrical specifications e Print media specifications The specification values here are based on preliminary data See www samsung com printer for current information Hardware specifications Item CLX 9252 9352 Series SCX 8230 8240 Series Dimension Height 1 153 mm 45 4 inches 924 mm 36 4 inches Depth 722 mm 28 4 inches 742 8 mm 29 2 inches Width 675 5 mm 26 6 inches 677 5 mm 26 7 inches Weight Machine without consumables and options 113 4 Kg 250 Ibs 93 7 Kg 206 6 lbs Duplex automatic document feeder 15 3 Kg 33 7 Ibs Environmental specifications Item CLX 9252 9352 Series SCX 8230 8240 Series Noise Level Ready mode 35 dB A 37 dB A Printing mode 54 dB A Copying mode 58 dB A 57 dB A Temperature Operation 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Storage 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storag
41. e 1 Sided Original Copies from one side of the original to one page of a booklet e 2 Sided Original Book Copies each side of an original to one page of a booklet Copying_ 68 _ _ Ea n 2 Sided Original Calendar Copies each side of an original to one page of a booklet The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text will be upright in the booklet Amm San oo a ao as ao a mp 7 gita a nan Binding Selects the direction of page order Left Output booklet will be opened to the left Fold amp Staple Select this setting to fold and staple printouts Off Disables this feature Fold amp Staple Select this setting to fold printouts The printouts can also be bound with center staples p age i Fold Select this setting to fold printouts only Divide Into Sets If you copy a document containing many pages select Divide Into Sets You can divide the output booklet into multiple batches The maximum number of sheets in a batch is 15 sheets For example if you copy 80 pages of a document and set the number to 10 First batch 1 40 pages 10 sheets Second batch 41 80 pages 10 sheets 7 Press OK from the display screen 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Book copying Use this feature to copy a book If the book is too thick lift the DADF until its hinges are engaged by the
42. e Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed e The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Message appears on your computer screen Device can t be set to the H W mode you want Port is being used by another program Port is Disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The machine cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Faxes are not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to fax e Make sure that there is paper in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the DADF or on the scanner glass e Check the recipient s fax machine i
43. folder Do not share this folder Share this folder Share name Shared Comment User limit Maximum allowed O Allow this number of users To set permissions for users who access this folder over the network click Permissions To configure settings for offline access click Caching Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings Scanning 92 Scanning originals and sending to a USB Advanced tab memory device scan to USB AMA You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB Advanced memory device When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan Original Size Auto settings see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 Original TS Ucvont meo Fa Orientation en PrO meges Understanding the Scan to USB screen Book Scan of a Press Scan to USB in the display screen Build Job Off Preview Basic tab BatesNumbering Off QB Ready 1 banman Ll Prosramns s5 1 1 K Back bel Save Document Ca Basic e Original Size Selects the size of originals see Selecting the size of originals on page 96 e Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals see Selecting the orientation of originals on page 97 C3 USB gt STICK ra 4 Fie s
44. in Doing so may give you an electric shock Turning the machine off Connecting a printer cable If you need to turn the machine off press the Power button for more than Using a network cable three seconds on the right side of the control panel When the confirmation window appears press Yes from the display screen then wait until power is turned off automatically This machine has a bulit in network interface card You can connect your machine to a network using a network cable Connect your machine to the network with a network cable TY A Z e The machine has three types of power off mode Press the Machine Setup gt General Settings gt Power Button Operation The Power Button Operation option can only be configured by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine For detailed information about the power off using the Power button refer to the Administrator s Guide e You can also turn the machine on pressing the Power button A If you turn the machine off directly using the main power switch above the power receptacle it could cause the hard disk problem in the machine Introduction_ 27 Adjusting angle of the control panel The display screen could not be seen depending on the angle of the control panel and light You can adjust the angle of the control panel to the direction which you want Introduction_ 28 Introducing the display scr
45. the jammed paper as shown below If this paper jam persists make sure the bin full sensor is unfolded 3 Close the right door Troubleshooting_ 221 Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face Up Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Gently pull the paper out of the output tray 2 Open and close the front door Printing automatically resumes The bin full sensor is located in front of the entrance of bridge unit Troubleshooting 222 Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejection to the top bin Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher top door 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Close the finisher top door Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to top bin Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher top door 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Close the finisher top door Troubleshooting_ 223 Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejecting to main bin Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher top door 2
46. toner cartridge again There is a problem in the toner cartridge Reinstall the toner cartridge If the problem persists call for service DCF Failure error number Check internal DCF connection There is a problem in the dual capacity feeder Open and close the dual capacity feeder or check the dual capacity feeder connection with the machine If the problem persists call for service DCF Failure error number Please open close tray number There is a problem in the dual capacity feeder Open and close the tray If the problem persists call for service color black toner cartridge Failure error number Install color toner cartridge again The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine see Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine on page 189 End of life Replace with new color imaging unit The life of the imaging unit expires totally Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 195 End of life Replace with new color toner cartridge The toner cartridge has run out The machine stops printing Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when the machine stops printing This message appears when the toner is completely empty and your machine stops p
47. 3 Pull out tray 1 Troubleshooting_ 211 Paper jam in tray 2 i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door ag Close the right bottom door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 3 Pull out tray 2 5 Insert tray 2 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes Troubleshooting 212 Paper jam in tray 3 3 Pull out tray 3 i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 5 Insert tray 3 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step Troubleshooting 213 Paper jam in tray 4 3 Pull out tray 4 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 5 Insert tray 4 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door automatica
48. D cma o eee inch Size Mama X Cancel e You can change the paper list on the display screen pressing inch Size or mm Size The paper lists are divided into the available A B type and letter type paper in this machine e If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper press the cardinal point arrows to set the paper size You can also set and save the custom size using Custom Size You can select the custom size whenever you need it 3 Press OK to save the selection Media and tray 47 Setting the paper type 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt select the tray you want from the display screen Auto Continue mama Nama Paper Tray 2 MP Tray Substitution Tray Prority Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Setting 2 Press Paper Type and select the paper type A A m Plain Letterhead Thick Paper Size SS 1 2 Paper Type Cotton Recycled Pre Printed Tray Confirmation Message Thincard Thickcard Thin stock stock CG v v AOK X Cancel 3 Press OK Auto tray switch This is the option to set if the machine is to continue printing or not when any tray becomes empty For example both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt Auto Tray Switch Auto Continue O Pap
49. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax 5 Press OK to save the information Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Faxing optional 116 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine For details refer to the optional fax kit installation guide If the caller leaves a message the answering machine records the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax Z e If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into the Fax mode after a predefined number of rings e f your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e If you are in the Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine otherwise the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you ar
50. Job complexity etc Samsung tab Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver If your computer is connected to the Internet you can have access to following services Click the Samsung tab to display the options Help This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword Service e Check for updates This option allows you to download updates for your printer driver e Samsung Website This option directly connects you to Samsung s Website e Registration This option allows you to register your machine e Buy Supplies This option allows you to order supplies on line Printing 147 Using a favorite setting The Presets option which is visible on each preferences tab except for Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use To save a Presets item 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box Presets AAH v Orientation x Landscape Rotate 180 Quality x Best m 3 Click LE Then all current driver settings are saved If you want to update the setting you made select more options and click El To use a Saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list and click Ei You can also restore the printe
51. Just keep printing The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The machine cable is loose or defective Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job Finally try a new machine cable The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Paper size and paper size setting do not match Set the correct paper size in the Custom Paper List in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences see Paper tab on page 142 The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again If you are ina DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Change the language setting Troubleshooting 242 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue C
52. Korea USA only standard pages a Declared yield value in accordance with 6 coverage At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge 1 Open the front door 2 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine 4 Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Troubleshooting_ 190 iH If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 6 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until locks in place i If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Cleaning paper dust stick and chargers of imaging units The paper dust stick and the charger of imaging unit will need to be cleaned after the specified number of paper is printed out When the message that demands you to clean the charger appears you have to clean the paper dust stick first Then clean the charger The time when the message appears depends on environmental factors like altitude temperature humidity and so on You need to clean the paper dust stick and the charger to maintain printing quality If cleaning is done the mes
53. Phonebook Recipients Name Fax Number B5 Fax number mo ice Outlook A ss Book Fax Quality Standard O Fine Cover Page Use cover page Advanced To Subject Message Notify me on delivery Send 6 Click Send Faxing optional 110 Checking a sent fax list Windows You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Journal Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent a a xag Refresh Print List Fiter Resend usng Samsung Network PC Fax xi iY For more information about Fax Journal click Help Sending a fax Macintosh To send a fax from your computer the Fax Utilities program must be installed This program is installed when you install the printer driver The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 Depending on the OS version the following steps will be different 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application Printer Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Serie fa Presets Standard AI Copies 1 4 Collated Sots Pages All a s 3 O From 1 to 1 2 Paper Size Other NG 20 99 by 29 70 cm eet Orientatio
54. Printing 141 e Portrait This option prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape This option prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate 180 Degrees This option allows you to rotate the page 180 degrees e Mirror Image This option allows you to reverse the original document like a mirror This option is available only when you use the PS printer driver Layout Options This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document e Single Page Per Side This option is a basic layout option This option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper e Multiple Pages Per Side This option allows you to print several pages on one side of a paper see Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 151 e Poster Printing This option allows you to print your document into a poster size document This option prints your document into several pages Paste printed pages together to form one poster size document see Printing posters on page 151 e Booklet Printing This option allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet see Printing booklets on page 151 e Page Border This option allows you to print your document on which border line is This option is not available for Poster Printing and Booklet Printing Double Sided Printing This option allows you to print on both sides of paper see Printing on both sides of the pap
55. Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document gt IZ The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab Select Edit in the Text drop down list Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Se mO Printing 154 Banner Printing Machine Setup 1 Access the Tray setting to set the paper size in MP tray see Tray setting on page 46 2 Click arrows to adjust paper size iW Paper handling ranges from 98 to 320 mm width 3 87 to 12 6 inches and from 148 to 1 200 mm length 5 8 to 47 3 inches Printer driver setting 1 Access the Paper tab to set the paper size in MP tray see Paper Options on page 168 2 Select Edit from the Original Size drop down list 3 Enter Custom Name and paper size to add Custom Paper List then click O
56. Right Page Prints only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Prints both facing pages from a left page e Both Pages From Right Prints both facing pages from a right page e Book Center amp Edge Erase Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of copies 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying 69 Cover copying The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job l4 You cannot use this feature while using Booklet see Booklet copying on page 68 Copies 0001 Advanced mage K3 Image Shift Covers Off a Front amp Back Add covers to copied set Booklet Book Copy B Front b lt Cover Sheet gt Covers LI Back 1 Sided Printed Sheet Transparency A 2 4 w Y OK X Cancel eee SSS 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Select the tray other than Auto that has the cover paper loaded in the Basic tab l4 e If you select Auto the Covers feature remains inactive e You have to select a tray that has paper of the same size and orientation as the originals 4 Adjust the settings for each copy such as
57. See Setting the tray confirmation message on page 49 Check if the paper size and type in the tray are detected or not If you want to set the paper size and type or if the machine cannot detect them you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window Some paper types are displayed with abbreviation Tab Ext stands for Tabloid Extra EXEC and STMT are Executive and Statement each Y e If you experience problems with paper feeding check whether the paper meets the media specification See Print media specifications on page 252 Then try placing one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray See Multi purpose tray on page 42 e The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel To print from an application a Open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 140 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type size and source d Press OK e Start printing from an application Media and tray 39 Optional high capacity feeder 3 Load paper with the print side facing up You can increase the paper handling capacity of your machine by installing an optional high capacity feeder This tray holds up to 2 000 sheets of paper The high capacity feeder can only hold A4 or letter sized paper Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems that
58. Tray gt Paper type gt Transparency gt OK from the display screen Press O and Copy from the display screen mn Press the Advanced tab gt Transparency from the display screen 6 Press the appropriate option e No Transparency Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Blank Separators Places a blank sheet between transparencies Select a tray which loaded paper for separating from Separator e Printed Separator Places the same image on the separator sheets as printed on the transparency Select a tray which loaded paper for separating from Separator 7 Press OK from the display screen l4 If you did not select Transparency in step 3 a pop up window appears 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying_ 70 Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document l4 This feature may not be available depending on models or option kits installed There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine You can also enter a watermark you want When you use this option Booklet in the Advanced tab is inactivated Copies 0001 Advanced age kx Watermark l Watermark Off Top Secret j The watermark option allows Overlay you to print text over an agd ijf
59. Tray setting Setting the paper size Setting the paper type Auto tray switch Auto continue Paper substitution Tray priority setting Setting the tray confirmation message Understanding the copy screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Basic copy Copying different sized originals Changing the settings for each copy Selecting the paper supply tray Reducing or enlarging copies Copying multiple sides Selecting the color mode CLX 9252 9352 Series only Deciding the form of copy output Changing the darkness Proof copying Using special copy features Selecting the size of originals Selecting the orientation of originals ID card copying N up copying Image Repeat Image shift copying Booklet copying Book copying Cover copying Transparency copying Watermark Overlay Stamp Poster copying Selecting duplex scan speed Setting job completion notification Build job Selecting the type of originals Erasing edges Changing the sharpness Changing the contrast Copying in a mirror image Adjusting background Erasing backside Images Copying in a negative image Using a programs setting Saving Programs Using Programs Managing Programs Using previous settings 80 Saving documents contents SCANNING 81 Using the Quick Copy menu 82 Basic scanning method 82 Understanding the scan methods 83 Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email 83 Understanding the Scan to Email scree
60. When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg 20 Select the policy for generating file name in Filing Policy If the server has the same named file already the file will get processed by following the file policy you selected e Change Name The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Cancel Does not save the sent file e Overwrite The sent file overwrite the existing file Setting up an address book 132 21 Enter the file name in File Name which is to be stored in the server 22 You can check if it works well according to the entered server information click Test 23 Enter FTP and WebDAV server information almost same as you do for SMB 24 Click Apply iY Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Add window is closed Editing addresses in Individual Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows i If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the mach
61. Y OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e ChangeName If the USB memory device already has the same name when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Cancel Does not send the scanned file if the file with same name is already there on the server e Overwrite The sent file overwrite the existing file 3 Press OK from the display screen scanning_ 102 Folder Creation You can set to create a new folder automatically for storing the scanned image to the USB memory device 1 Press the Output tab gt Folder Creation from the display screen Quality Scan Preset File Format On File Policy Folder Creation 1 1 SY OK X Cancel 2 Press On 3 Press OK from the display screen Using a programs setting This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the last jobs Saving Programs 1 Press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB from the display screen 2 Setscan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 3 Press the Basic tab 4 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 5 Press Programs Is Book Scan from a Samsung MFP Recent Document sent to you using a
62. ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 www samsung com NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com NORWAY 815 56 480 www samsung com OMAN 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com PERU 0 800 777 08 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 256 COUNTRY REGION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG 172678 www samsung com 022 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com RUMANIA 08010 SAMSUNG 08010 726 7864 only from landline local network www samsung com Romtelecom local tariff 021 206 01 10 for landline and mobile normal tariff RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung com SAUDI ARABIA 9200 21230 www samsung com SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG 0700 726 7864 www samsung com SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 678 www samsung com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 SAMSUNG www samsung com SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 CHF 0 08 min www samsung com ch www samsung com ch fr TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com 022 6
63. also change the number of copies pressing Change Settings e Edit Changes the Job Name of the selected job e Delete Removes the selected job from the list e Print Prints the selected job from the list e Close Closes the job status window Introduction 31 Meaning of status Receiving The machine is receiving data from network or fax line Image Processing The machine is processing the image decoding encoding converting data format Formatting The machine is generating the image for printing Pending The job on the queue is waiting for its turn Transferring The machine is transferring the data to email server or fax Scanning The machine is scanning Dialing In the fax mode the machine is dialing to receiver s fax machine Connecting In the fax mode the machine is waiting to connect to destination Printing The machine is printing Storing The data is storing to a box or a USB Delayed Job The job is temporarily stopped until the time you set for Delay Send email fax server Held In the Secured Job tab the job is temporarily stopped when the secure print job is sent from a computer You can release the job pressing Print Held Proof Print The job is temporarily stopped when the proof print job is sent from a computer You can release the job pressing Release Held Proof Copy In the copy mode the job is temporarily stopped when the proof copy was selected You can release the job pres
64. and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iH If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login i If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Click Groups 9 Check the group address you want to edit and press Edit Group The Edit window appears 10 Change the group address information 11 Click Apply IZ Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Edit window closes Deleting Group addresses in a Groups Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows Z If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login i If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will be logged out autom
65. and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other unusual characteristics Using the DADF you can load up to 100 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond for one job 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals 2 Load the originals face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray i Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean Media and tray_ 36 Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Guidelines to select the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the fo
66. application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 Condition suggested solution Scan and Fax Manager 2 does not work Check your system requirements Scan and Fax Manager 2 works in Windows operating system only Fax problems optional condition suggested solutions The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working e Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet No dial tone sounds e Check that the phone line is properly connected e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly see Setting up an address book on page 128 The original does not feed into the machine
67. associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format index A address book SyncThru Web Service 132 adjusting background copying 77 faxing 121 answering machine fax 117 AnyWeb Print 182 B booklet printing 151 booklets 151 buttons Counter 29 ECO 30 Help 32 Interrrupt 32 Job Status 30 Power Saver 32 C color mode faxing 121 scanning 99 connect network cable 27 printer cable 27 control panel 24 convention 11 copying adjusting background images 77 76 60 75 basic copying 52 69 68 74 changing color 56 76 78 55 70 duplex scan speed 73 edge erase 75 77 ID card copy 62 image repeat 66 job completion notification 74 n up copy 63 overlay 71 poster copy 73 79 60 reducing or enlarging copies 55 saving documents 80 61 54 61 74 72 transparency copying 70 understanding the copy screen 50 watermark 71 D default settings setting a fax header 113 tr
68. both sides of paper You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are as follows e Long Edge Binding This option is the conventional layout used in book binding Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars 1 From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation 3 Select a binding orientation from Two Sided option 4 Select the other options you want to use 5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper Printer 10 88 181 197 aA Presets Standard Copies GF M Collated C Two Sid Pages All F OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size LAG nj 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation LG la Layout Pages per Sheet 1 4 Layout Direction Z S In PN a fes Border None 4 Two Sided v Off Long edge binding Short edge binding P C PoF Supplies Low Cancel Print A If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy Printing 160 Linux printing Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any su
69. box with SyncThru Web Service on page 178 l4 If important data is stored in the Document Box we recommend you to backup the data regulary Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine To use the Document Box feature press Document Box on the display screen e Understanding details of the document box screen e Using document box features e Using the box with SyncThru Web Service Document Box allows you to store the scanned data on HDD your machine s hard disk drive in your machine The stored data can be sent to different destinations like Fax Email Server Box or USB O File Detal Seach Pe G ES e Favorite box list Displays three favorite boxes you set e Box display area Displays all boxes You can select a box in this area e Detail Displays information of selected box in detail e Search Allows you to search a box or stored data e Select Enters the selected box If you select Secured and set a password when you make a new document box enter the password when the Password window appears e Save Document Saves documents on HDD in your machine see Saving documents on page 169 4 Select bal Save Document iiss o This button allows you to move to USB Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to misa LS J You can choose the layout for viewing the boxes from the box or list
70. can export an address book file to your computer for backup of the file or to another machines Samsung produced 1 2 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows IZ If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login IZ If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out Click AddressBook Select Export The Export window appears Individual Address Back Selected 0 Total 1b Ax 500 Add All Fl Panata Speed Not anne Email Fax Gf FIP Webba F l friend friendi Babe com zt a fared friendi ebs com DEPOSITO CI J amiwir company iibe com 402300 2 FI Ka 4 Hompay aipa eii teat a F 5 gibir Gonchar AA FJ ue unieran GT al 1 comma 186 201 1215 F figs samaan THO Fj 4 BG servei ERTES IEI mr 10 testbed 18 207 114 32 l i share ftp itp l nage 10 88 54 112 F FE personal 10 88 181 175 14 favorite Favorite FI gand EENE Ea Fl Wiad magnasang com LIST DY 9 Click Export Then the address book file stored in your computer Setting up an address book_ 134 Grouping add
71. capacity feeder optional 1 Cabinet Stand 3 High capacity feeder 2 High capacity feeder right bottom door Introduction 23 Control panel overview U 2a e Ko a so oe Display screen Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation You can set menus easily using the display screen Status LED Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the status LED on page 25 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running queued jobs completed jobs current error code or secured jobs Counter Shows the amount of paper used See Counter button on page 29 Eco Turn into Eco mode See Eco button on page 30 Power Saver Turn into power saver mode See Power Saver button on page 32 Numeric keypad Dials numbers and enters alphanumeric characters You can also enter the number value for document copies or other options FH PB BABAO bo Reset Resets the current machine s setup Help Gives detailed information about this machine s menus or status Clear Deletes characters in the edit area Log out Allows user to log out Interrupt Stops a job in operation for urgent copying Stop Stops an operation at any time The pop up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Start Starts a job Power Turn the power on or off When
72. cartridge Replace with new color black imaging unit The indicated imaging unit has almost reached its estimated imaging unit life The machine will stop printing Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 195 Staple cartridge is low Replace cartridge Small amount of staple cartridge is left The estimated life of staple cartridge is close Prepare a new staple cartridge for a replacement Replace with new fuser unit The life of the fuser unit expires totally Replace the fuser unit with a Samsung genuine fuser unit Staple cartridge is not installed Install it in finisher The staple cartridge is not installed or the staple cartridge is not properly installed Install the staple cartridge If it is already installed try to reinstall the staple cartridge If the problem persists call for service Replace with new Transfer roller The life of the transfer roller expires totally Replace the transfer roller with a Samsung genuine transfer roller Staple cartridge of booklet is empty Replace cartridge The staple cartridge of booklet has reached the end of its lifespan This message appears when the staple cartridge is completely empty Replace the staple cartridge Replace with new tray number pickup roller The life of the tray pickup roller expires totally Repla
73. click Cancel 10 The scanned image appears If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar see Using the Image Manager on page 108 11 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar 12 Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 13 Click Save Adding Job Type Settings You can save your scan option settings for later use To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use the following tools to edit the image Scanning_ 108 Tools Name Function ny Save Saves the image fa Undo Cancels your last action a Redo Restores the action you canceled Ei Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image Crop Crops the selected image area Zoo
74. color e Scan Size Allows you to choose the scan size e ADF Duplex Automatically scans both sides If your model does not support this option it will be grayed out e Default Allows you to go back to default options 5 When setting is done press OK Scan Assistant The Scan Assistant window appears when you press Quick Scan in Scan and Fax Manager 2 Scan Assistant allows you to adjust scan settings and start the scanning process 1 From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Scan and Fax Manager 2 gt Scan and Fax Manager 2 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager 2 window Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Series 10 88 163 130 NO HEYWOOD01 Ready To Not suppo 3 Press Quick Scan The Scan Assistant window appears In the Basic mode Scan settings and Preferences are available only If you want to use more settings press Advanced Z Click the Help button from the lower left corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the Scan Assistant Scanning 106 1 1 1 L Favorites Allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use When you save Favorites all current scan settings are saved To use a saved setting sel
75. control panel to begin copying OOO k 5 scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer This chapter includes e Basic scanning method e Understanding the scan methods e Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email e Scanning originals and sending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server e Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB e Attaching stored documents e Previewing image to be scanned Z The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution Basic scanning method You can scan the originals with your machine via the network e Easy Printer Manager EPM EPM is a Windows based application that combines Samsung device settings into one location e Easy Document Creator EDC This program is accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process This feature can be used via a network connection
76. features 138
77. files to print 1 Execute printui sfile name to print5 command For example you are printing document1 printui document 1 This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options Printul Print Job Manager AA a il he Qu Choose Printer 7 set as Default Type Postscript Description Color Printer Location Reseption Fage selectian Copies gt Al Pages lA Even Pages ae Odd Pages w Page Range i _ Collate Copies ex 1 2 5 10 15 _ Reverse Order Humber of Copies 1 Unified Unix Prini folk c ancel H elp 2 Select a printer which has been already added 3 Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection 4 Select how many copies needed in Number of Copies K To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties see Changing the printer settings on page 162 5 Press OK to start the print job Printing 162 Print Printer Properties ee ere a aa Pi TI General Image Text HP Lie Margins samsung Printer Paper size Paper Type Printer Default Paper Source Printer Auto selection Orientation Portrait A Mone wp Landscape ae Long Edge Reverse Portrait cohort Edge w Reverse Landscape Multiple Pages Pages per sheet i Page Layout Len to right top to bottom Page Border m Style None H elp Alpply Clan
78. input tray Troubleshooting 206 6 Turn the misfeed clearing wheel in the direction of the arrow to remove Original paper jam in duplex exit area of scanner the jammed paper Ka i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover a CI EE CO 8 Close the DADF input tray and the DADF cover Load the removed originals back into the DADF Troubleshooting 207 6 Turn the misfeed clearing wheel in the direction of the arrow to remove the jammed paper 7 Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF 4 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 5 Open the DADF Troubleshooting 208 If you do not still see the jammed original or not easily removed it go to 10 Close the exit tray cover the DADF input tray and the DADF cover Load the next step the removed originals back into the DADF 8 Open the exit tray cover Troubleshooting 209 Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs refer to th
79. maximum permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web setting will be downloaded as an outline Type 1 font Service For the detailed information about them refer to This option lets you fine tune the Automatic setting or override the Administrator s Guide the Download as Bit Image setting for the Advanced Font Text Options see Advanced on page 143 7 Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window Send CTRL D Before Each Job Specifies whether the printer will be reset at the beginning of every PostScript document The default is unchecked CTRL D will reset your printer to its default setting to ensure that prior jobs won t affect the current print job CTRL D may cause a print job to fail if your printer is connected through a network If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports check this option Send CTRL D After Each Job Specifies whether the printer will be reset at the end of every PostScript document The default is checked CTRL D will reset your printer to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs won t be affected by the current print job CTRL D may cause a print job to fail if your printer is connected through a network If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer uncheck this option K If you click Reset settings in the Advanced returns to the default setting Font Substitution Displays the font
80. of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login iY If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out Click Box Select the box you want to enter Click Browse Files Then stored data list appears ay Emuna LIST 10 e Edit You can change the name of the selected document which is stored e Delete You can delete the stored document selected If you check the column header s check box all documents are checked e Previous You can return to the previous page e Combine You can combine two or more stored data as one file Document box 180 Search By Name Qi You can search for a document that is currently stored in the box Al i You can select a job type in the job type list Selected job types get sorted out in the stored data list e Thumbnail If you check Thumbnail you can see the thumbnail of stored documents e List You can set the number of documents in the list So you can see as many as documents as the selected number in the List e Preview If you check the Preview box you can preview the image of the selected data in the list You can also use Print and DownLoad To PC directly Click Print or DownLoad To PC e Task You can use many convenient functions for stored data User Box Common C
81. of the machine e None Disables this option e Eco Printing Eco mode gets activated Select Double Sided Printing Layout Color Mode and Skip Blank Pages you want to use in eco mode As long as you do not change the options from the other tabs the document will be print out as set in the eco mode e Password If the administrator sets On Forced in Default Eco Mode for this machine the eco mode is always set by this machine s eco setting while the Eco Options in the printer driver is disabled If you need to change the print settings click Password and enter the password or contact your administrator Result Simulator Result Simulator shows the result of reduced emission of carbon dioxide used electricity and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected i e The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco mode is disabled e Referred to the calculation coefficient about CO2 energy and paper from IEA the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www remanufacturing org uk Each model has a different index e The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing power comsupmtion in this machine e The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the operating system used computing performance application software connection method media type media size
82. off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Network cable is disconnected Check it The machine is not connected with a network cable Connect the machine to the network with a network cable Paper jam at entrance of booklet maker Paper has jammed during booklet printing Clear the jam see Paper jam at entrance of booklet maker 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only on page 228 Option Feed door is opened Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place Paper jam at entrance of finisher bridge Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam inside of finisher bridge on page 226 or Original paper jam in exit area of scanner The originals are jammed in duplex automatic document feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam in exit area of scanner on page 206 Original paper jam in front of scanner The originals are jammed in duplex automatic document feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam in front of scanner on page 201 Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejection to the top bin on page 223 or Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejecting to main bin on page 224 Original paper jam inside of scanner The originals are jammed in duplex automatic docum
83. on some features Some options in the features are not available to use in the eco mode For detailed information about eco feature refer to the Administrator s Guide i e Only administrators have permission for Eco Setting in Machine Setup e If the machine requests a password for eco mode you need to enter the password Contact your administrator e The Eco button is activated only for Copy Quick Copy and Document Box menus Status Description Off The machine is not in the Eco mode Green On The machine is in the Eco mode Job Status button When you press the Job Status button the screen lists the currently running queued and completed jobs A nad a Copies 0001 Current Job Senac Active Notice jg Secured Jot 00 Result s No Job Type Status Job Name User Delete All Current Job Displays the list of jobs in progress and pending A Pag Copies 0001 01 Result s 1 1 Pages No Job Type Status Job Name User 50_guide_engish_100408 pdf Detail Delete Delete All Close d d e No Gives the order of jobs e Job Type Displays type of the job such as print copy fax etc e Status Displays the current status of each job see Meaning of status on page 31 e Job Name Displays the name of the job e User Displays the name of the job owner e Detail Displays detailed information of selected job from the lis
84. option e JPEG Scans originals in JPEG format e PDF Scans originals in PDF format You can open the file with the Adobe Acrobat Reader MultiPage If you want several originals to be scanned as one file press MultiPage Secure You can set the password for the PDF file created using this option You can also set whether to allow users to access the the created PDF file to print or modify Searchable The machine detects text in the scanned image and creates a searchable PDF for text searching Press this button and select a language that is used in the scanned image Press OK iY This option is available only when the optional advanced scan kit is installed Compact You can compress originals to create a small sized file press Compact This compression method is different from the normal PDF format Some data parts can be lost during compression Add Digital Signature You can insert a digital signature in the PDF with a certification K Only Administrator can manage the digital certificate on Digital Signature in PDF from SyncThru Web Service For detailed information about Digital Signature in PDF refer to the Administrator s Guide on the User s Guide CD e TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format If you want several originals to be scanned as one file press MultiPage e XPS Scans originals in XPS XML Paper Specification If you want several originals to be scanned as one file press
85. optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries Features by models include FEATURES SCX 8230 Series SCX 8240 Series CLX 9252 Series CLX 9352 Series USB Memory Interface o o e Duplex Automatic Document Feeder o 6 Hard Disk e 8 Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN e o o Duplex 2 sided printing o o o Right Output Tray O O O 1 250 sheet Standard Finisher O O O O 3 250 sheet Booklet Finisher O O O O Bridge Kit O O O O 2 3 Hole Punch Kit O O O O 2 4 Hole Punch Kit O O O O Cabinet Stand O O O O Dual Cassette Feeder O O O O High Capacity Feeder O O O O Working Table O O O O Fax Kit O O O O Fax Multiline Kit O O O O FDI Kit O O O O Expansion Memory Module 1G O O O O SmarThru Workflow x O O O O CounThru 2 O O O O Advanced Scan Kit O O O O Scanner Dehumidifying Heater Kit O O O O Cassette Dehumidifying Heater Kit O O O O e Included o Optional Features of your new product_ 14 introduction These are the main components of your machine This chapter includes e Machine overview e Control panel overview e Understanding the status LED e Turning the machine on e Connecting a printer cable e Adjusting angle of the control panel e Introducing the display screen and useful buttons e Understanding the pop up keyboard e Using the manual stapler e Using the pen and paper cl
86. preview image before scanning see Previewing image to be scanned on page 95 e Programs Allows you to save the current settings for future use Scanning 83 Advanced tab see Using a programs setting on page 103 Save Document Saves document in your machine s HDD see Saving documents on page 104 This button allows you to look closely into some options or you can see options as a whole by pressing a et This button allows you to move to USB Copy Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to Advanced Original Size Auto Original R Orientation 4S Upright Images Delay Send Off Book Scan Off mya Build Job Off eee rograms 1 2 1 K Back bal Save Document Se EEE Original Size Selects the size of originals see Selecting the size of originals on page 96 Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals see Selecting the orientation of originals on page 97 Delay Send Sets the machine to send an email at a later time automatically see Delaying a scanned image transmission on page 97 Book Scan Allows you to send a scanned file of book or catalog in an email attachment see Book scanning on page 98 Build Job Allows you to scan several pages or different types of originals into a file for sending see Build job on page 98 Back Returns to the Basic tab Job Completion Notification Sends an emai
87. representative White Spots If white spots appear on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Troubleshooting 243 Condition Suggested Solutions Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level
88. same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency e Blank Separator Places a blank sheet between transparencies e Source Select a tray with paper to use as a separator Graphics tab Quality Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and printing needs graphics The higher setting may also increase the printing time of a Click the Graphic tab to display the options shown below document When you check Glossy printing the machine allows you to 2 Printing Preferences Paper Device A4 Omm 210x297mm Qinch Print Mode Normal v Color Mode Color O Grayscale O Best Normal O Draft _ Glossy printing Font Text C JAI Text Black Graphic Controller Fine Edge v cc maa Color Mode You can choose color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale To adjust color manually click Advanced Simply slide the color balance slider in the Levels tab to adjust color or click the Matching tab for driver provided color correction for general image processing 4 e If you click Reset settings in the Levels or Matching return to the default setting e You can change the image which is in the Advanced option Click the Import Image button and selec
89. screen When you press Copy from the display screen the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily If a different screen is displayed press to go to the home display screen Copying 50 Using a programs setting Saving documents Using the Quick Copy menu Basic tab A C TE Copies 0001 Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Auto Original 10026 Copies Enters the number of copies Paper Supply Selects the paper supply tray see Selecting the paper supply tray on page 54 Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image see Reducing or enlarging copies on page 55 Duplex Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper see Copying multiple sides on page 55 Color Mode Selects a color mode for making copies see Selecting the color mode CLX 9252 9352 Series only on page 56 Output Sets the machine s various output options see Deciding the form of copy output on page 56 Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading when the original contains faint markings and dark images see Changing the darkness on page 60 Proof Copy Allows you to print one copy first to check the quality then print the rest of copies later see Proof copying on page 60 Programs Allows you to save the current settings for future use see Using
90. socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher cannot scan via Gimp Front end Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detailed information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use another kind of scan application refer to application s Help encounter the Cannot open port device file error when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurs try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window The machine does not print whole pages and output is printed on half the page It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and has been reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL G
91. stacking 50 sheets stacking e 1 600 sheets for the high capacity feeder Colored Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Pre Printed paper section 400 sheets stacking e 50 sheets stacking e 1 600 sheets for the high capacity feeder Recycled Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond paper section e 400 sheets stacking e 1 600 sheets for the high capacity feeder e 100 sheets stacking Thin cardstock Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond e 350 sheets stacking e 1 400 sheets for the high capacity feeder 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond e 20 sheets stacking Thick Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 170 to 216 g m 45 to 57 Ib bond 170 to 216 g m 45 to 57 Ib bond cardstock paper section e 350 sheets stacking e 20 sheets stacking e Not available in the high capacity feeder Thin glossy Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 106 to 169 g m 28 to 45 Ib bond paper section capacity feeder 20 sheets stacking Thick glossy Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 170 to 253 g m 45 to 67 Ib bond paper section capacity feeder 10 sheets stacking Transparency Letter A4 Re
92. stored data You can copy a stored document to a specific box 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in to the machine 6 Click Login iY If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out 7 Click Box 8 Select the box which has the document you want to copy Then click Browse Files 9 Select the document you want to copy Then click Copy To Box The Copy To Box window appears 10 Select the box where the copied document will be stored 11 Click Select to begin copying Moving stored data You can move a stored document to a specific box 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in to the
93. substitution table and options for changing the TrueType to printer font mapping This option is available only when you use the PS printer driver Font Substitution Table Settings Font Substitution Table System Font Device Font rial Unicode MS Don t Substitute Batang Don t Substitute BatangChe Don t Substitute Dotum Don t Substitute DotumChe Don t Substitute Don t Substitute Reset Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print Job Accounting Settings Settings User permission Group permission User ID heywood Enter Password 4 32 Alphanumeric Confirm Password 4 32 Alphanumeric Job Accounting Password Encryption User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job YH e If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption e Administrators can enable job accounting and configure Printing 150 Using special print features Special print features include e Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 151 e Printing posters on page 151 e Printing booklets on page 151 e Printing on both sides of the paper on page 152 e Change the size by percentage of your document on page 152 e Fitting yo
94. that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees Z To use 2 Sided Book and 2 Sided Calendar load the originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided 3 Press OK from the display screen Faxing optional 119 Selecting the orientation of originals When faxing double sided documents specify the document orientation Otherwise the faxes may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Original Orientation then set the original orientation Advanced Original Size Upright Images Duplex Original Sideways Images A Onentation Kama Delay Send Priority Send 1 2 v vV OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Upright Images Select this setting for an original document loaded with the top toward the back of the machine Using the DADF Using the scanner Icon LA e Sideways Images Select this setting for an original document loaded into the DADF with the top of the original document toward the left side of the machine or an original document placed on the scan glass with the top of the original document toward the right side of the machine Using the DADF Using the scanner Icon Kg 3 Press OK from the display screen Changing the resolution The default document set
95. the USB memory device from the machine Attaching stored documents When you send a stored document to email or server by Scan to Email or Scan to Server this option allows you to attach a document stored in the document box You can only attach documents stored in the document box Also the documents should be stored in the document box before being attached see Document box on page 167 Sending a stored document Press Scan to Email or Scan to Server from the display screen Enter the recipient s email or server address Press Attach Press a document box which has the document to be attached Press Select Press a stored document to be attached Press OK The attached document name is displayed Select the attached file format using the left right arrows Press Start on the control panel The machine sends the attatched file to the email or server oa AD AP AN Previewing image to be scanned Before sending a image you can see the scanned image using the Preview feature The preview image is applied with the set options in the Advanced Image or Output tabs If necessary you can reset the scan options after checking the previewing image Using the Preview button 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB from the display screen 3
96. the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit Troubleshooting_ 196 11 Pull out the OPC protecting pad iH If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric AN e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary 12 Hold the handles on the new imaging unit and push the imaging unit until it locks into place 13 Close the inner cover Troubleshooting_ 197 15 Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window cleaning stick Slowly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5 times to clean the LSU window 16 Insert the LSU window cleaning stick back into its place 17 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place UU Troubleshooting 198 18 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the waste toner container 2 Squeeze the left right locking levers and push outward Then remove the waste toner container CLX 9252 9352 Series When the life of the waste ton
97. the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the DADF K Media and tray 35 Leaving the DADF open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the DADF until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 inch start copying with the lid open Be careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt Do not put hands on the scanner glass while closing the DADF The DADF may fall on your hands and cause injury Do not look at the light inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes In the duplex automatic document feeder DADF Preparing originals e Do not load paper smaller than 140 x 140 mm 5 5 x 5 5 inches or larger than 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 inches e The DADF can automatically detects Statement LEF Statement SEF JIS B5 LEF JIS B5 SEF A5 LEF A5 SEF A4 LEF A4 SEF Letter LEF Letter SEF B4 Ledger Legal and A3 sized originals e Do not attempt to load the following types of paper in order to prevent paper jam low print quality and machine damage Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper e Remove all staples
98. to place another page Load another original and press Yes You can change the copy setting pressing Change Settings if necessary When you finish select No on this window 7 The machine starts to print out Selecting the type of originals The original type setting is used to improve copy quality by selecting document types for current copy jobs Copies 0001 Original Type Text Copied Original Erase Edge os z a Text Photo 4 ele Text amp Printed Photo Map EJ Contrast Photo Light Original er Mirror 1 2 wv Y OK X Cancel e Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Image tab gt Original Type from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Text 4 Printed Photo Use for originals contain text mixed with photographs e Photo Use for photographs e Copied Original Use for copied documents e Map Use for maps e Light Original Use for light documents 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing edges You can copy the original without any edges
99. transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper Originals The first example of some
100. use this option Priority Send in the Advanced tab are inactivated e When you use this option you cannot send a fax using the On Hook button on the display screen 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 6 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel Or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers 7 Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send gt On Advanced Original Size Job Name Off Fax Job Send Duplex Original O Hour 01 12 Minutes 00 59 i n romain J a A v 47 A q FM bB ma Ay a Delay Send Priority Send 1 2 wv Y OK X Cancel 8 Press the Job Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the job name you want Press OK If you do not enter a job name the machine assigns the job name as Fax Job Send 9 Set the delay sending time Y You can set the delay sending time to be 15 minutes later than the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting to be 1 15 If the set time is
101. you can enter server addresses singly or you can enter server addresses directly using Add Entering server addresses from the address book 1 Press Scan to Server from the display screen 2 Press Address Book Address 4 Add Preview Attach a AHA NANA Programs Duplex Resolution PARA 4 1 Sided gt 4 300 doi gt fr Save Document 3 Press the Search input area Then the pop up keyboard appears 4 Enter the first alphabet or full server name you are looking for Then press Ok 5 Press Search When searching is completed the screen displays the search results 6 Press the server name you want from the search results and press Ok Press the delete icon Xx to delete a server address entered Scanning 89 Entering server addresses manually 1 Press Scan to Server from the display screen 2 Press server address input area or Add Then the Direct input appears Jad Direct input Name Untitled e SANS WEBDAV P Address I paa R Host i E E Host Name fe Host 1 2 FTP Port No 445 peas Anonymous a User Password z GAO X Cancel 3 Press type of the server from among SMB WEBDAV or FTP 4 Press the Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the server name Then press OK 5 Press IP or Host and press the IP Address Host Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation o
102. you set this option to Maximum the printing speed will be high but the printing quality will be low This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver fH If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting PostScript Options These options are available only when you use the PS printer driver PostScript Options Output Option Optimize for Speed PostScript Language PostScript 3 Send PostScript Error Handler Reset e Output Option This option allows you to select the output format for PostScript files Optimize for Speed General format for PostScript files Optimize for Portability Creates a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions ADSC This is a useful format to use when you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different machine Encapsulated PostScript EPS Creates a file as a image This is a useful format to use if you want include the file as an image in another document that will be printed from a different program Archive Format Creates a PostScript file you can use it later e PostScript Language This option allows you to choose the PostScript language level e Send PostScript Error Handler If this options is checked the machine prints an error page when an error occurs during printing 4 If you click Reset settings in the PostScript Options returns to the default setting Prin
103. your administrator e Off Disables this feature e On This feature can be used e New Makes a new overlay form This option is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e Detail Displays information of the selected overlay form You can preview and print the stored overlay form e Edit Changes the name of the selected overlay form e Delete Deletes the selected overlay form e Overlap You can select the overlap option for applying the overlay Front The overlay will be printed in front of the text Some text might not be shown under the overlay Back The overlay will be printed behind the text Transparent The overlay will be applied transparently Select a overlay form from the list and press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Stamp Prints the date and time page number or user ID on printouts When you use this option Booklet and Poster in in the Advanced tab is inactivated Copies 0001 Advanced mage pa Watermark Stamp Page Number IP Address j Prints the date and time Overlay page number or user ID on kam printouts Stamp Time 4 Date Poster Copy User ID Duplex Scan ca Speed A 34 W VY OK XxX Cancel ee 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust th
104. 0 Bce 0 Preview a ka ra Attach ida Programs Duplex Resolution kaaa 4 1 Sided p 4 300 doi gt bal Save Document Press From s input area and Add Edit Then pop up keyboard appears Enter the sender s email address you want see Entering email addresses by the pop up keyboard on page 86 iH You can also enter a sender s email address using Address Book or Recent see Entering email addresses by the address book on page 85 or Resending the latest email address on page 86 Press Title then pop up keyboard appears and enter the title of email you want Press OK Press Msg then pop up keyboard appears and enter the message of email you want Press OK Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 Press the Start button to scan and send the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window l4 e Tocancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is sending an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax e If you already configured the From Address S
105. 194 Replacing the imaging unit Lift the locking lever upward Then remove the waste toner container SCX 8230 8240 Series The machine uses four colors and has a different imaging unit for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K When the life of the imaging unit expires totally The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing imaging unit Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine At this stage the imaging unit needs to be replaced Click this link to open an animation about replacing the imaging unit 1 Open the front door 2 Hold the left right locking levers and push outward at the same time Then remove the waste toner container CLX 9252 9352 Series N 4 2 TT MU NT a S D JY g NN Te SE W Vi i os Troubleshooting_ 195 7 Remove the tape on the handle 8 Pull the rubber stopper out of the developer 9 Remove the tape wrapped around the developer a x 10 Remove the tape on the imaging unit 4 Pull the corresponding imaging unit out from the machine 5 Remove the new imaging unit from its package Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the imaging unit A 6 Remove
106. 200 300 400 JPEG PDF TIFF XPS 600 Scan to USB 100 200 300 400 JPEG PDF TIFF XPS 600 Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 JPEG PDF TIFF XPS 600 Selecting the size of originals 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Original Size then use the up down arrows to set the original size Advanced Original Size lt Custom gt 25 297mm AA Original 3 Orientation 1 2 Delay Send A4 D ee a Book Scan al 210 A3 D A5 5 Build Job 2iw inch Size VY OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option Y You can change the paper list on the display screen pressing inch Size or mm Size The paper list is divided into the available A B size type and letter size type paper in this machine e Custom Selects the copying area of the original Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size The custom size is different depending on where the originals are placed In the DADF On the scanner glass Minimum size 128 x 128 mm 25 x 25 mm 5 x 5 inches 1 0 x 1 0 inches Maximum size 297 x 432 mm 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 0 inches 11 7 x 17 0 inches e Auto Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports only when originals are Letter Ledger Legal Statement A3 A4 A5 B4 or JIS B5 sized e Mixed Size Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several tr
107. 3 Check user s guide HDD is almost full in the machine Check System Log at Security in SyncThru Web Service If necessary remove the data in System Log Finisher Error error number Please open close door There is a problem in the finisher Open and close the finisher door If the problem persists call for service Finisher Error error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the finisher Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Finisher System Failure error number Please open close door There is a problem in the finisher Open and close the finisher door If the problem persists call for service Finisher System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the finisher Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HDD is almost full 4 Check user s guide HDD is almost full in the machine e Print or remove the jobs on the queue which are waiting for its turn You can check the jobs pressing Job Status see Job Status button on page 30 e Print or remove the received fax jobs in Secure Receive see Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 117 Front door is open Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place HDD is almost full 5 Check user s guide HDD is almos
108. 4 e For more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help e Use TWAIN compliant softwares to apply more scan options e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop e f scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager To find out about Scan and Fax Manager program information to check the installed scan driver s condition to change scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in Scan and Fax Manager program follow these instructions 1 From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar click Scan and Fax Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager 3 Press Properties 4 Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings to add or delete application programs and to format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change port Local or Network 5 When done press OK Linux scanning You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window Scanning 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop 2 Click the us button to switch to Scanners Configuration 3 Select the scanner on the list If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer and turne
109. 5 e Priority Send Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations see Sending a priority fax on page 116 e Back Returns to the Basic tab e Back Returns to the Basic tab Faxing optional 112 Image tab Original Type Text Color Mode Mono Darkness Level 5 a o poo Backside Off YEY 1 1 K Back bal Save Document e Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned see Selecting the type of originals on page 121 e Color Mode Selects the color mode in which you want to send the fax see Selecting the color mode on page 121 e Darkness Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax see Changing the darkness on page 121 e Adjust Background Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals see Adjusting background on page 121 e Erase Backside Image Prevents faxing the original s image shown through on the backside see Erasing backside images on page 122 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Sending a fax This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission i When you place the originals you can use either the DADF or the scanner glass If the originals are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DADF first because it has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate you
110. 5 Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in to the machine 6 Click Login Document box_ 178 iY If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will be automatically logged out 7 Click Box 8 Click Add Box The Add window appears __ Apply Undo Cancel Box Name Favorite None Auto Document Delete 1 day s F Secured Box Password Confirm Password 9 Enter the box name to be added Box No is automatically filled with the first free number 10 Select the Favorite option if necessary If you set Favorite 1 Favorite 2 and Favorite 3 your machine displays them in Document Box You can set only three favorite boxes If all favorite boxes were selected a warning message appears 11 Select the Auto Document Delete option After deleting files the files cannot be restored e 1 Day s 30 Day s Set up the period for which stored data is kept in the box After the period the stored data will be automatically deleted e Off The stored data will not be deleted 12 Check Secured Box to prevent unauthorized person from accessing Enter the password and re enter the password K If you do not want to use the Secured Box option skip this step Any user can access the created document box 13 Click Apply K Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Add window is closed Edit Box You can change the settings of a created box Z Only t
111. 61 Otherwise it could cause original na document jams We recommend below combinations to be used for copying different sized originals You can use the other combinations which are not recommended but it could cause original document jams 4 A3 and A4 A3 and B4 Ad and B4 5 B4 and B5 Letter and Legal 6 Letter and Ledger e Copying_ 53 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the different sized originals face up in the DADF When you place them in the DADF align and gently push them to the rear side of the DADF width guide Press the Advanced tab gt Original Size gt Mixed Size from the display screen Mixed Size is activated when the originals are placed in the DADF Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tab if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad on the control panel if necessary Press Start from the control panel to begin copying Changing the settings for each copy You can also set a paper tray with the More button On the Basic tab of the Copy screen you can select copy features before starting to copy IZ The Basic tab setting is only for the current copy job which means the selected settings do not apply to the n
112. 89 3232 TRINIDAD amp TOBAGO 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com U K 0330 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com UKRAINE 0 800 502 000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua ru UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 257 glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g 802 11b g can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11g up to 54 Mbps 802 11b g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some
113. B memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press USB from the display screen Press USB Format Press OK when the confirmation window appears Press Close from the display screen eo O Viewing the USB memory capacity 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press USB from the display screen 3 Press USB Capacity The USB Capacity window appears G Oh 11 7010 0715 PM Total memory 2 0G 4 Free Space 1 4G USE Fonmal a Data Space 616M USB Cupacity 616M LESK Print Scan lo LIB lt New Folder Detail Nerame Oclete 4 Press Close from the display screen Using a USB memory device_ 166 document box This guide gives you information on Document Box This chapter includes e Understanding the document box screen e Box setting e Saving documents Understanding the document box screen You can store documents sent from computers or scanned images in the Document Box The Document Box is located on your machine s hard disk drive HDD It means the documents are stored on the HDD You can create a password for a certain document box so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the documents to several destination such as email server or fax You can set a document box and use document box feature with SyncThru Web Service see Using the
114. DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Scan to Server from the display screen 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Press Recent Address Is Book 3 4 Add Preview Attach Programs Duplex Resolution 4 1 Sided b 4 300 dpi gt mi Save Document KE naes ma si Seve ponen 6 Press the server address you want to resend Then press OK 10 88 124 14 110 88 165 111 168 219 104 112 10 88 165 110 Add to IS Address Delete IZ e Add to Address Allows you to add a server address in the Recent results to the Address Book e Delete Allows you to delete a server address in the Recent results Press the server address you want to delete Then press Delete 7 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 8 Press the Start button to scan and send the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window An example of security configuration for anonymous user on SMB server To send data to an SMB server the security configuration on the SMB server should be set to use the Anonymous option The following proce
115. Duplex Resolution od 600 doi Original Orientation Ki Upright Images gt VY OK XxX Cancel e Original Size Selects the actual paper size of the originals e Color Mode Selects the color options of scanned data e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans one side of the original or both sides of the original e Resolution Selects scanning resolution value e Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals 5 Press File Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the file name you want Then press OK 6 Press OK to scan and store the scanned data l4 e To cancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window Document box_ 172 Viewing detail information You can see the detailed information of the selected out of stored data You can also change the name and file property of the selected stored data pressing Edit 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 9 005 Kk comm kk test X rele 3 File s 1 File 0 File Favoritel Favorite2 F
116. H Copies ai M Collated Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 B 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Lad Graphics H Quality Best Ss Normal a4 4 lol b55 O Draft Color Mode Color O Grayscale SAMSUNG O F7 Gawi Atom rine e Quality This option allows you to select the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document e Color Mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer 10 88 181 197 i a Presets Standard Ha Copies fi W Collated C Two Sided Pages PJ All C From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 1 20 99 by 29 70 em Orientation J 2474 ioft Go SAMSUNG O CB Capi A tow Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission Printer 10 88 181 197 W a Presets Standard B Copies 1 M Collated O Two Sided Pages Al BI M O From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 AA 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation 1 j
117. K 4 Select Same as Original Size from the Output Size drop down list 5 Select MP tray from the Source drop down list then OK Using direct printing utility This chapter explains how to use the Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without open the files A e HDD should be installed on your machine to print PDF files using this program e You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing e You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing e Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created e The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1 7 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it What is Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine to print without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To install this program select Advanced Installation gt Custom Installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver Printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility window 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All P
118. Loading originals on page 35 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad Press Proof Copy Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Check the quality of the printout When the proof copy confirmation window appears if you like the printout quality press Continue The rest of the copies will be printed out If you press Cancel the rest of the copies will be cancelled Using special copy features On the Advanced or Image tab of the Copy screen you can select specific copy features Selecting the size of originals Copies can be produced after specifying the document scanning size if the document size cannot be detected automatically or if you wish to specify a certain document size Copie Advanced Original Size 25 297mm Ad Original By Orientation pA ID Copy oa N Up A5 5 Custom Size Image Repeat v 1 4 v inch Size vV OK X Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduc
119. MFP Recent EB Document sent to you using a San Add Edit Ce 0 Bcc 0 Preview a a Nama al Attach a Programs Duplex Resolution 4 1 Sided b 4 300 dpi gt ball fave Document 7 Press Send amp Store or Store only e Off Disables this option e Send amp Store Sends and stores scanned originals e Store only Stores scanned originals only 8 Press File Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the file name you want Press OK 9 Select a destination box and press OK 10 Press Start from the control panel to begin scan and send the file and storing or storing only If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window i e Tocancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel You can also delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is sending an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Scanning 104 Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 program that is installed on your network connected computer For a network connected machine Make sure the scanner driver is installed on your computer 1 Ma
120. Message Angle Color Ss Gray mj O Horizontal as pa g Vertical 0 Angle Shade Medium 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style color size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list 6 When you finish editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list Editing a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing 153 Deleting a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit fr
121. MultiPage 3 Press OK from the display screen The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option if Mono has been selected for Color Mode in the Image tab File Name You can make the name of the file attached to be sent If you do not make a file name before you send it by email the machine automatically creates a file name The machine made name is based on the user ID logged in date and time iH e If nobody is logged in to the machine Untitled shows instead of user ID in the name e The time in the name is based on a 24 hour clock e The length of a file name is limited to a maximum of 128 characters e Some special characters cannot be entered in the name 1 Press the Output tab gt File Name from the display screen Output Quality Scan Preset File Format File Name Untitled _20101026_ 1610719 eee File Name 2 Press File Name s input area Then pop up keyboard appears Enter the name of the file to attach 3 Press OK from the display screen File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file names before you proceed with the scan job through the USB memory device If the USB memory device already has the same name entered you can rename or overwrite it 1 Press the Output tab gt File Policy from the display screen Output Quality m Change Name Scan Preset File Format Cancel File Policy Overwrite Folder Creation 1 1
122. O w B B is Print You can print the selected stored data see Printig stored data on page 180 Copy to Box You can copy the stored data to a specific box The stored data is kept in the box see Copying stored data on page 181 Move to Box You can move the stored data to a specific box The machine deletes the stored data after moving see Moving stored data on page 181 DownLoad To PC You can download a stored document to your networked computer see Downloading a document to your computer on page 181 Printig stored data You can print a stored document 1 2 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows i If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in to the machine Click Login iH If you do not use SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out 7 Click Box 8 Select the box which has the document you want to print Then click Browse Files 9 Select the the stored data you want to print Then click Print The Print window appears 10 Set the appropriate printing options 11 Click Print to begin printing Copying
123. OD GR YAR RYAN ECS SCX 8230 8240 Series i imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product copyright 2010 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for informational purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc e This product includes software developed at the University of California Irvine for use in the DAV Explorer project http www ics uci edu webdav e ABBYY FineReader Engine for Embedded OS 2009 ABBYY ABBYY FineReader the keenest eye in OCR ABBYY FINEREADER and ABBYY FineReader are registered trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd e All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information IF YOU USE THIS MACHINE TO PRODUCE AND THEN USE COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY YOU WILL BE PUNISHED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT OF THE LAW
124. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out Recommended media Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox such as 3R 91331 A4 3R 2780 Letter Labels Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machines e When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 0 5 inches of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation e Make sure th
125. Poster Copy Duplex Scan Speed a 34 w VY OK X Cancel PARN 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Press the Advanced tab gt Poster Copy Press On to activate this feature Select a tray in Paper Source Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying oy ee MI Om i Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order Selecting duplex scan speed This option allows you to speed up the copy scanning In this case you can save the working hours But the copy quality could be reduced Copies 0001 Advanced mage Watermark EE Duplex Scan Speed Normal Speed up the copy Overlay scanning But the copy V quality could be reduced Stamp High ee ee Poster Copy Duplex Scan Speed A 34 V Sai XX Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Press th
126. Press Copy from the display screen 2 Press Programs gt List 3 Press the appropriate option Copies 0001 Copy gt Programs gt List No Program Name ic teste Select All Detail Edit Delete OK Cancel e Select All Selects all programs for deleting all e Detail Displays detailed information of the selected program e Edit Changes the name of the selected program e Delete Removes the selected programs 4 Press Cancle for return to the Basic tab Copying_ 79 Using previous settings 1 2 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Programs Select a previous setting you want to use For example if you want to use the settings from the last job press Previous 1 G nead Copies 0001 Copy gt Programs Previous2 Previous3 Previous4 List d lt Pmitled Set Value Menu R 176 No Of Copies 0001 Duplex Type 1 1 Sided aper Supply Tray 2 Color Mode Auto f 1 feduce Enlarge Original 100 Output Type Collated v Save Delete VY OK Xx Cancel m a P A nasaan Press OK Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to copy according to the setting you selected Press Start from the control panel to begin copying Saving documents You can
127. REV 1 00 Copyright_ 2 contents COPYRIGHT CONTENTS 11 13 INTRODUCTION 15 MEDIA AND TRAY 35 About this user s guide Features of your new product Machine overview Front view 1 Front view 2 Rear view Inner view CLX 9252 9352 Series Inner view SCX 8230 8240 Series View with Standard finisher optional View with Booklet finisher 1 optional View with Booklet finisher 2 optional View with Cabinet stand and High capacity feeder optional Control panel overview Understanding the status LED Turning the machine on Turning the machine off Connecting a printer cable Using a network cable Adjusting angle of the control panel Introducing the display screen and useful buttons Display screen Counter button Eco button Job Status button Help button Interrupt button Power Saver button Understanding the pop up keyboard Using the manual stapler Using the pen and paper clip holder Viewing the animation for trouble shooting Loading originals On the scanner glass In the duplex automatic document feeder DADF Selecting print media Guidelines to select the print media Loading paper in the tray Standard tray optional dual cassette feeder Optional high capacity feeder Multi purpose tray Media sizes automatically detected Printing on special media Envelope Transparency Labels Card stock Custom sized paper Contents 3 contents COPYING Contents_ 4 Letterhead Preprinted paper Glossy
128. Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 5 Press the Advanced tab gt Covers from the display screen 6 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Front Prints the document with the front cover e Back Prints the document with the back cover e Front amp Back Prints the document with the front and back cover 7 Press 1 Sided Printed Sheet in Cover Sheet to select if the cover will be 1 sided 2 sided or blank paper 8 Select a tray in Paper Source 9 Press OK from the display screen 10 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Transparency copying This feature prevents copies to print onto transparencies from sticking together as a cause by heat that is produced during copying You can also copy originals to the separator sheets Copies 0001 Advanced mage Image Shift Transparencies No Transparency Create a single set of Booklet transparencies with blank dividers Book Copy Blank Separators Covers Printed Separator Transparency a 24 w Sel X Cancel ee aaa 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Load the right sized transparencies with the side to be printed facing down on the multi purpose tray 3 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt MP
129. San Add Edit Cc 0 Bee 0 i Attach ie AA Programs Duplex Resolution 4 300 dpi gt bal Save D S 6 Press Program Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the program name you want Then press OK IZ You can see the values of set Programs by scrolling up or down and check the values using the up down arrows 7 Press Save When the confirmation window appears the settings you set are saved Click Go to List or Close Using Programs 1 Press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Programs gt List Press a program name you want to use on the list Press OK Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected 7 Press the Start button to scan and send the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window ot ae iH e Tocancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel You can also delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is send
130. Save Convert Existing Files 1 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen 2 Click Existing File to E Book gt Start 3 Click Add Image to find the file to convert 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name and select a save location 5 Click Save Management tools_ 185 Sending a Fax 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Click Send Fax from the home screen Click add file and locate the file to fax Click Send Fax Enter the fax information recipient s number cover page information etc 6 Click Send om oh Plug ins Easy Document Creator will also create new plug ins for Microsoft PowerPoint Word and Excel These new plug ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator menu on the applications menu bars Scan to Office Send Fax and E Book Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator Refer to the Administrator s Guide After the driver is installed on your Linux system the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and sel
131. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 4 Set scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 5 Press the Basic tab Enter each item 6 Press Preview The preview image appears Delete page w Send X Cancel Tools Function Reduces the preview image by 2 times or 4 times You can view the reduced image Magnifies the preview image by 2 times or 4 times You can view the desired portion of the enlarged image Fits the preview image on the preview screen If the scanned image contains mutiple pages press 2 the left right arrow for previewing the another pages Rotates the preview image 90 degrees GH d 1 4 CG counterclockwise or clockwise Delete page Deletes the previewed page from the scanned data 7 Press Send The machine sends the file to destinations If you want to reset the scan features press Cancel Scanning 95 Changing the scan feature settings This section explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The settings you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Scanning from both sides of originals This feature especially ap
132. Then enter the group name using the pop up keyboard Then press OK 3 Press the Member input area Then enter the name of individual you want to include in the group using the pop up keyboard Then press OK Z If you are not sure of the name you can use the Search button Enter the first few letters or just press Search The machine shows the individual list Press the name you want and then press OK Go to step 5 4 Press Add then the name of individual is saved 5 Press OK to save the information Setting up an address book_ 129 Editing Group address 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book from the display screen 2 Press the name of group you want to edit Then press Edit lt 4 Index gt ABC DEF GH KL MNO gt kama or 383 T m ae 20 Result s 5 Pages Name Type Favorite company oe Group Total 2 kirk Individual zmean Individual Kk SelectAll New Detail Edit Delete Close a ee cc rrr r nr r e pna a Naan IZ If you want to delete a group address press Delete 3 Press the Group Name input area Change the group name using the pop up keyboard Press OK Gy Group Name Member Add Search 0 Result s 2 Pages Eric 671234589998 4 eric01 stardust co t 2 Mato 634544589987 12 neretlyak omiya d ow VvV OK 2X Cancel m Ka 4 Press the Member input area Enter the name of individual you want to i
133. USB memory device on page 165 e Scan to USB Sends you Scan to USB see Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB on page 93 e Printing from a USB memory device e Managing usb memory About USB memory device USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device e Print data stored on a USB memory device e Format the USB memory device Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector B5 Of Nad kad Use only a USB memory device with metal shielded connector Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it Using a USB memory device 164 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Z Do not insert the USB memory device to other ports except the ports which is as shown below the image If you insert the USB memory to other ports the machine shows warning message on the display screen A e Do no
134. Watermark Overlay Text Output Options Print Order C Skip Blank Pages C Manual Margin Printer Status Watermark This option allows you to print text over an existing document see Using watermarks on page 152 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper see Using overlay on page 153 This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Output options e Print Order This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will print Select the print order from the drop down list Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages are available only when you use the PCL printer driver Normal This option allows you to print all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages This option allows you to print all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages This option allows you to print only the odd numbered pages of the document Print Even Pages This option allows you to print only the even numbered pages of the document e Skip Blank Pages This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages in the original data e Manual Margin This option allows you to specify binding margin Binding margin adjusts binding position This option is not available when you use the PS printer driver e Advanced This option allows you to set advanced output options for printing This option is available o
135. You can combine two or more stored data as one file 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 005 x test x rele 1 File 0 File Favorite2 Favorites 0 Fie 1 File 0 File O File 4 Select bel Save Document Detal Seach 2 Press two or more stored data you want to combine and press Combine iH You can use this feature if the job types of the selected documents are the same If Combine is inactivated when you select documents make sure that job types are the same Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box am EE i M MM 6 File s 1 2 2010 05 11 1 2 1 Fax 2010 05 11 Print List Combine 3 Press the Combine new file input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the box name Then press OK Combine new file 2 File s 1 Page Jame Image Size Thumbnail 10485760 _ 1 demo Q t 4 V OK 4 Press OK Using the box with SyncThru Web Service K If important data is stored in the Box we recommend you to backup the data regulary Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine You can store documents sent from computers or scanned images in the Box You can create a password for a certain document box so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a varie
136. a programs setting on page 79 Save Document Saves document on the hard disk drive HDD in your machine see Saving documents on page 80 Ki This button allows you to look closely into some options or you can see options as a whole by pressing a This button allows you to move to USB Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to Advanced tab e Overlay Allows you to use a overlay to apply to copy outputs see You can move to next or previous page using up down arrows at the bottom Overlay on page 71 left e Stamp Allows you to print with some information see Stamp on Copies 0001 Advanced mage Original Size Auto Orche Ss Upri k ko Orientation dS Upright Images ID Copy SEF maa N Up Off Image Repeat Off Programs 1 4 w i Back m Save Document Original Size Selects the actual paper size of the originals see Selecting the size of originals on page 61 Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals see Selecting the orientation of originals on page 61 ID Copy Prints 2 sided originals on one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card see ID card copying on page 62 N Up Prints 2 or more original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper see N up copying on page 63 Image Repeat Prints multiple image copies from the original document o
137. abric fH Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur Troubleshooting 188 4 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside Replacing the toner cartridge the machine Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K When the toner cartridge is totally empty e The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing toner e The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory However when the color toner cartridges are empty but there is toner left in the black toner cartridge you can still print black and white print jobs The submitted job must be in black and white e Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine Model Average yield Part name CLX 9252 Series Average continuous black cartridge yield 25 000 standard pages CLT K606S Black Region AP CLT K6062S Black Average continuous colored cartridge yield 15 000 standard pages Cyan Magenta Yellow CLT C607S Cyan CLT M607S Magenta CLT Y607S Yellow Region AP CLT C6072S Cyan CLT M6072S Magenta CLT Y6072S Yellow CLX 9352 Series
138. ack when it is scanned In that case the original document can be sent after adjusting the background color of the transmission data 1 Press the Image tab gt Adjust Background Original Type Adjust Background Erase Color Mode Scan an original from a newspaper or magazine to remove its background image Darkness Auto Adjust Background Enhance Erase Backside i Image 1 1 vV OK X Cancel N oneness 2 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background S e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is 3 Press OK When you use this option Erase Backside Image in the Image tab is inactivated Faxing optional 121 Erasing backside images This feature prevents faxing the original s image being shown through on the backside 1 Press the Image tab gt Erase Backside Image from the display screen Onginal Type Erase Backside Image Off ng Scan an original from a Color Mode newspaper or magazine to Erase Backside Image Darkness Auto a a Adjust Background Erase Erase Backside a Image 1 1 2 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the backside e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the backside image is 3 Press OK from the display screen When you use this option Adjust Background in the Image
139. act the Samsung customer care center COUNTRY REGION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE ALBANIA 42 27 5755 ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 0 07 min www samsung com AZERBAIJAN 088 55 55 555 BAHRAIN 8000 4726 www samsung com BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 BELGIUM 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be fr French BOSNIA 05 133 1999 BRAZIL 0800 124 4211 www samsung com 4004 0000 BULGARIA 07001 33 11 www samsung com CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG 062 726 7864 www samsung com CZECH REPUBLIC 800 SAMSUNG 800 726786 www samsung com Samsung Zrt Ceska organizacni slozka Oasis Florenc Sokolovska394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com EGYPT 0800 726786 www samsung com EIRE 0818 717100 www samsung com EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG 726 7864 0 14 min www samsung com GEORGIA 8 800 555 555
140. all folder creation options are enabled at same time the sent file s will be stored as below e When single scanned file is sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOC jpg e When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2010 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg 12 Press OK to save the information Editing Individual address 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book from the display screen 2 Press the name of individual you want to edit Press Edit 4 index gt ABC DEF GH KL MNO b 20 Result s 5 Pages Name Type Favorite a company ig Group Total 2 kirk Individual visitor CI Group Total 4 z 75 SelectAll New Detail Edit Delete Close S MM iY If you want to delete an individual address press Delete 3 Press the input area you want to change Then change the contents using the pop up keyboard or numeric keypad on the control panel If you use the pop up keyboard press OK after changing the contents 4 Press OK to save the information Storing Group address 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book gt New gt Group from the display screen A Name Member Add Search embe 0 Result s Pages Name Fax No Speed Dial i Fax Ema XX Cancel 2 Press the Name input area
141. ally come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located Glossary_ 262 USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc
142. als on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email or Scan to Server from the display screen 3 Setscan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 4 Enter the destinations information 5 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 6 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Completion Notification Press On to activate this feature 8 Press Email Address input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the email address which you want to recieve the job completion notification Press OK N i e You can select the email address pressing Address Book e You can enter an email address only 9 Press OK from the display screen 10 Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning Selecting the type of originals The original type setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type for the current scanning job 1 Press the Image tab gt Original Type from the display screen J Original Type Color Mode Darkness Text Photo Sharpness Photo Contrast 1 2 v VOK X Cancel lasini ama amenna 2 Press the appropriate option e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when originals are photographs 3 Press OK from the display screen Select
143. alue in text to the gray provided by the PostScript driver Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray Specifies whether to convert the true gray RGB value in graphics to the gray provided by the PostScript driver Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts Specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro character Job Timeout Specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document If you specify O the printer will continue trying to print indefinitely Wait Timeout Specifies how long the printer will wait to get more PostScript information from the computer After the specified time passes the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message If you are trying to print a very complicated document you may want to increase this value If you specify O the printer will wait indefinitely Minimum Font Size Specifies the minimum font size in pixels for which the PostScript driver will download TrueType fonts as outline Type 1 fonts A font smaller than the minimum setting will be downloaded as a bitmap Type 3 font This option lets you fine tune the Automatic setting for the Advanced Font Text Options see Advanced on page 143 Maximum Font Size Specifies the maximum font size in pixels for which the PostScript driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap Type 3 fonts A font larger than the
144. am inside of booklet maker 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only Paper jam before booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only Paper jam after booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only 234 Understanding display messages 240 Solving other problems 240 240 241 241 243 Contents Power and cable connecting problems Display screen problem Paper feeding problems Printing problems Printing quality problems 9 contents 245 246 246 246 247 247 248 249 Copying problems Scanning problems Scan and Fax Manager 2 Problem Fax problems optional Common PostScript problems Common Windows problems Common Linux problems Common Macintosh problems 250 Specifications 251 Electrical specifications CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE GLOSSARY Contents_ 10 about this user s guide This user s guide provides information to provide a basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanations on each step during actual usage Valuable for both novice and professional users all users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Z e Read the safety information before using the machine e If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Troubleshooting on page 188 e Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter see Glossary on page 258 e Use the Index to find information e All illustrations in this user s guide may
145. ame of the SMB server 18 Enter the scan file folder for storing scanned images in Path Example sharedFolder 19 Select the Scan folder creating policy option you want e Create new folder using login name If you select this option the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named using the user name which is you entered in step 15 i If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name already the machine does not create a sub folder e Create new folder every You can set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine create a sub folder according to this option set iY If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name already the machine does not create a sub folder Day A sub folder is created every day The sub folder name format is YYYY MM DD e g 2010 01 01 Month A sub folder is created every month The sub folder name format is YYYY MM e g 2010 01 Year A sub folder is created every year The sub folder name format is YYYY e g 2010 e Create new folder only if scan output consist of several files If you select this option and scanned multiple files the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected and the sent files will be stored in the sub folder IZ If all folder creation options are enabled at same time the sent file s will be stored as below e When single scanned file is sent folder user name 2010 01 01 DOC jpg e
146. amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system Glossary_ 258 CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy
147. amp in the Advanced tab are inactivated e This feature is possible only with Letter Legal A4 JIS B5 Statement Executive A5 8K 16K Ledger Tabloid Extra A3 and JIS B4 sized print media e You can only use the Fold amp Staple option when the booklet finisher is installed e When you select Fold amp Staple or Fold in Fold amp Staple the printed paper automatically gets printed out in the booklet finisher Copies 0001 Advanced mage KO Image Shift 2 Sided Booklet Off 3 Original 2 io ss Calenda Copy document arranging Booklet Calendar the pages so that the paper can be folded in half to produce booklet Sided lt Bindina gt Book Copy Original nia CFold amp Staple gt Covers 0 Sided old amp pie EE Original mm Book Transparency a 24w Y OK X Cancel a eee 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Booklet from the display screen 5 Select a tray in Paper Source iH If you need to use the Fold amp Staple option with the booklet finisher you have to load the paper by short edge feeding 6 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature
148. an edit the address directly pressing Edit in the detail s screen or if you select a group address you can also see the individual addresses in the group address using Detail Setting up an address book 131 Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service You can store addresses conveniently from the networked computer using SyncThru Web Service Only for users registered in the machine can store addresses through login SyncThru Web Service Storing on your local machine This method means that you store addresses on your machine s memory You can add addresses as well as group them in particular categories Adding addresses in Individual Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login YH If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Click Add Then the Add window appears Apply Undo Cancel General Name Speed Dial Number 16 Favorite al E mail E mail Address Fax Fax Phone Number
149. anaging Programs 103 Using previous settings 104 Saving documents 105 Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC 105 For a network connected machine 105 Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 Contents_ 5 contents 106 107 107 107 107 107 108 108 FAXING OPTIONAL 110 110 110 111 111 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 114 114 114 114 115 115 116 116 116 119 119 119 120 120 122 Scan Assistant Scanning with TWAIN enabled software Macintosh scanning Scanning with network Linux scanning Scanning Adding Job Type Settings Using the Image Manager Preparing to fax Using a fax in your computer Sending a fax Windows Checking a sent fax list Windows Sending a fax Macintosh Understanding the fax screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Sending a fax Setting the fax header Sending a fax Sending a fax using speed dial numbers Sending a fax manually using On Hook Sending a fax manually using an extension telephone Resending Automatically Redialing the last number Delaying a fax transmission Sending a priority fax Receiving a fax Changing the receive modes Receiving manually in Telephone mode Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone Receiving in secure receiving mode Selecting a received fax output tray Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper Receiving faxes in memory Adjusting the document s
150. anel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties e For PS driver select PS driver and right click to open Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties l4 If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 5 Select Device Options Z The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using 6 Select the appropriate option e Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the Tray 3 4 dual cassette feeder or High Capacity high capacity feeder Also you can see the tray information and set the paper size and type in Advanced If you select Reset settings in the Advanced returns to the default setting e Finisher Options Select the optional finisher you installed You can select the Standard Finisher 1K or Booklet Finisher 3K e Storage Options Select the memory capacity which is installed in the machine This option is available only when you use the PS printer driver e Hole Punch Options This option is available only when you set Finisher Options Select the optional punch kit you installed You can select the 2 3 Hole or 2 4 Hole K The available punch kit may differ from country to country Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased you
151. aneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typic
152. ange Name The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Cancel Does not save the sent file e Overwrite The sent file overwrite the existing file 10 Press the File Name input area Enter the name of the sent file using the pop up keyboard Press OK 11 Select the Folder Creation option you want using the left right arrows e Use Login Name If you select On in this option the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named using the user name which is you entered in step 5 iY If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name already the machine does not create a sub folder e Folder Creation Cycle You can set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine create a sub folder according to this option set iY If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name already the machine does not create a sub folder Every Day A sub folder is created every day The sub folder name format is YYYY MM DD e g 2010 01 01 Every Month A sub folder is created every month The sub folder name format is YYYY MM e g 2010 01 Every Year A sub folder is created every year The sub folder name format is YYYY e g 2010 e Create Folder For Multiple Files If you select On in this option and scanned multiple files the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected and the sent files will be stored in the sub folder iY If
153. apled You can use the manual stapler when the standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed It is useful to use the manual stapler in filing several pages The way to use the manual stapler is same as that of the standard finisher and booklet finisher 1 Arrange the documents before stapling 2 Press the manual stapler button at the top of the finisher When the green light in on the manual stapler is ready to stapling If the documents get inserted properly the manual stapler button will blink three or four times and then staple with flipping sound Introduction_ 33 Using the pen and paper clip holder You can keep pens paper clips and other small office supplies in the Pen and Paper Clip Holder The Pen and Paper Clip Holder has a magnet inside to prevent the paper clips from scattering Do not place cards which have magnetic strip on the pen and paper clip holder it could be damaged by magnetic forces Viewing the animation for trouble shooting When the problems in the machine occur some error messages are shown with animations to help you solve the problems You can see the animation to shoot the trouble pressing View iH This machine does not show the animations of all the problems For the errors of which messages are not shown with animation refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Understanding display m
154. are rendered Standard is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of standard monitor SRGB Monitor Vivid mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color images than that of Standard mode Device mode is best used for printing fine lines small characters and color drawings The color tone of Device mode may be different from that of monitor the pure toner colors are used for printing cyan magenta and yellow colors Corporate Imaging is most common color setting used in the corporate environment e Fine Edge This option allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability e Skip Blank Pages This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages in the original data e Screen This option allows you to select options to convert a continous tone image into printable binary image e Finishing You can select the print output options such as staple offset and etc This option is available only when the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed e Booklet Printing This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet Some options in Booklet Printing are available only when the optional stanard finisher or booklet finisher is installed e Front Cover Prints the document w
155. at N Up Manual Repeat Image Repeat 4 wv VOK X Cancel Canem Copying_ 66 6 7 8 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press the Advanced tab gt Image Repeat from the display screen Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Repeat The number of images is automatically determined depending on the original image and the paper size The number of repeating images will be automatically selected based on size of the original size of output page and the reduce enlarge ratio ABC gt e Manual Repeat You can select the number of images manually from 2 4 6 8 9 or 16 ss ss Press Off in Border to print a border around each page on the sheet e Off Disables this feature e Full Line Prints a full line around each page e Dotted Line Prints a dotted line around each page e Cross Line Prints a cross line around each page Select a tray in Paper Source Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Image shift copying To avoid images overlapping with punch holes staples etc you can move the image s positon Z If you select Auto in Paper Supply this feature remains inactive Copies 0001 Advanced mage Image Shift N
156. at there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can Cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components e Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine e Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or damaged e Do not load paper that does not have space between labels running the same direction as the paper is being fed Otherwise it could cause paper jams Media and tray_ 46 Card stock Custom sized paper e Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 8 inches wide or 148 mm 5 8 inches long e Inthe software application set margins to at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Letterhead Preprinted paper Single sided double sided Standard tray Face up Face down Optional dual cassette feeder Multi purpose tray e Preprinted paper must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second e Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers
157. at you use to log on Windows Enter Password Enter a password you want to use This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it Store This mode is used only for storing documents on the HDD If necessary you can load and print the stored documents You can find the stored file in the Document Box see Document box on page 167 First choose a document box in Save Location and then set Options Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Enter Password If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the document box This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it e Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing documents at the same time If necessary you can load and print the stored documents You can find the stored file in the Document Box see Document box on page 167 First choose a document box in Save Location and then set Options Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel UserID This option is used when you need to
158. atically Click AddressBook Click Groups Check the group addresses you want to delete 0 Click Delete Group Click OK when the confirmation window appears ee ai i Setting up an address book_ 135 Checking Group Addresses You can see group addresses information You can also add or delete individual addresses in the Group Details window 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login i If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Click Groups 9 Press the group address you want to see Press Group Details The Group Details window appears Individual Address Book Groups Address Book companygroup Speed No User Name ie Speed No User Name l John i Ss Alex it Nadson a la Samsung Printer v Delete Total 2 MAX 500 K e You can add individual addresses directly Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book e You can delete individual addresses directl
159. atically detect whether the scanned document is in color or black and white and then select an appropriate color setting e Full Color Select this setting to print the same as the original image color Refer to the sample images below Depending on the circumstances and quality of originals the printout s quality could be different from the sample image s Original Copy e B W Select this setting to print the copy in black and white regardless whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white Refer to the sample images below Depending on the circumstances and quality of originals the printout s quality could be different from the sample image s Original Deciding the form of copy output IZ You can use the copy output options when a optional standard finisher or a booklet finisher is installed e Depending on the direction of paper in the tray ex SEF or LEF certain directions of the staple or punch may not be available e When you use the staple and punch together you can only set the same position for staples and punch holes Press the Basic tab gt Output then select the copy output options you want Copies 0001 lt Staple gt Off HE jj Uncoated C 1 Staple lt Offset gt 8 A n I 2 Staple ir D On lt Staple Direction gt lt Output Tray gt N r Finishing Tray yv OK 2X Cancel e Sort When you copy several sets you can s
160. avorite3 Detal Seach Select Save Document anew PAE ME PEETA 2 Press the stored data for which you want detailed information and press Detail 3 The Detail window appears Check the detailed information K If you want to change the name press Edit 4 Press Close Editing stored data You can change the name of the selected stored data 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 a 005 comm Kk test rele 3 File s 1 File OFile Favoritel Favorite2 Favorite3 5 boxes O File 0 File Detail Search 4 Select bal Save Document CA NA ae Vea 2 Press the stored data you want to edit Press Edit 3 The Edit window appears 4 Press File Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the file name you want Press OK Deleting stored data You can delete the selected stored data 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 9 005 amp comm pk test ye rele 3 File s 1 File OFile Favorite Favorite2 Favorites 5 boxes refere O File 0 File Detail Search Select Save Document AAP IG PA UE PEA 2 Press the stored data you want to delete Press Delete 3 Press OK when the confirmation window appears Document box_ 173 Sending stored data You can send the stored data to specific destination using Fax Email Ser
161. ax kit is not installed Install the optional fax kit If it is already installed try to reinstall the optional fax kit If the problem persists call for service HCF is pulled out Insert it properly The high capacity feeder is not securely latched Close the high capacity feeder until it locks into place Fax System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the fax system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HDD is almost full 1 Check user s guide HDD is almost full in the machine Check Address Book or User Profile If necessary remove the data which is unused in Address Book or User Profile FDI device is not installed Install the device The FDI optional FDI kit is not installed Install the optional FDI kit If it is already installed try to reinstall the optional FDI kit If the problem persists call for service HDD is almost full 2 Check user s guide HDD is almost full in the machine Check Document Box or Secured Job in Job Status If necessary remove the data which is unused in Document Box or Secured Job Feed door is opened Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place Finisher door is open Close it The finisher door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place HDD is almost full
162. ay regardless of the document size Select a tray and press On e Paper Supply Selects a tray that contains the paper to be printed e Detail Displays detailed information of the file selected e Delete When you select multiple files in step 3 you can delete a file from the list if necessary e Output Sets the machine s various output options such as copy output option see Deciding the form of copy output on page 56 6 Press OK from the display screen to begin printing 7 After printing is completed you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Press USB 8 Press Safe To Remove USB and press OK when the confirmation window appears 9 Remove the USB memory device Managing usb memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press USB from the display screen 3 The machine shows all files in the USB memory device Press the file you want to delete iY If the file is in a folder press the folder name Then press Select 4 Press Delete 5 Press OK when the confirmation window appears 6 Press Close from the display screen Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert a US
163. ay setting 47 deleting address book 131 direct printing utility 155 display screen 24 divice options 149 document box box setting 168 178 saving documents 169 172 SyncThru Web Service 178 understanding the document box screen 167 170 171 document feeder 36 duplex printing copy 119 print 152 duplex sending faxing 119 scanning 96 E easy document creator 184 configuration 185 device name 185 e book conversion 185 plug in 186 quick scan 184 185 scan 184 185 186 SNS scanning 185 editing group address 130 individual address 129 email address entering email addresses by the address book 85 erasing background copying 77 faxing 122 Index_ 263 scanning 100 erasing backside scanning 101 error message 234 extension telephone 117 F favorites settings for printing 148 fax receiving changing the receive mode 116 extension telephone 117 in answering machine fax 117 118 receiving in duplex 118 secure receiving 117 118 fax sending delay sending 115 redialing the last number 115 114 sending a fax 113 116 fax email individual address 128 faxing adjusting darkness 121 120 changing receiving mode 116 delaying a fax transmission 115 erasing backside images 122 forwarding 123 preparing to fax 110 124 125 receiving 116 118 117 116 117 115 saving documents 127 120 121 119 113 116 118 113 understanding the fax screen 112 features 13 machine features 250 Pos
164. ays For example if the originals are 3 pages in total the 1st page is the letter sized paper the 2nd page is the legal sized paper and the 3rd page is the letter sized paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and then letter in order from several trays Mixed Size is activated when the originals are placed in the DADF e Other preset values Allows you to easily select values commonly used Scanning 96 3 Press OK from the display screen Selecting the orientation of originals 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Original Orientation then set the original orientation Advanced Original Size m Upright Images Original Orientation Delay Send Sideways Images A Book Scan Build Job 1 2 v vV OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Upright Images Select this setting for an original document loaded with the top toward the back of the machine Using the DADF Using the scanner Icon LA e Sideways Images Select this setting for an original document loaded into the DADF with the top of the original document toward the left side of the machine or an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the original document toward the right side of the machine Using the DADF Using the scanner Icon glass Kg 3 Delaying a scanned image transmission You can set your machine to send a scann
165. b otherwise a jam may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm 0 25 inches curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or damaged Temperature Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation e Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds e Do not use stamped envelopes e Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials e Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes e Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope Media and tray_ 45 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm 0 6 inches from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Transparency To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand the machine s fusing temperature
166. blem in the imaging unit Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service Troubleshooting 234 Message Meaning Suggested solutions color Imaging Unit Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the imaging unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Message Meaning Suggested solutions color imaging unit is not compatible Check user s guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine on page 195 color imaging unit is not installed Install it The imaging unit is not installed or the imaging unit is not properly installed Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists call for service color imaging unit is not original Samsung Check user s guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine on page 195 color black toner cartridge Failure error number Please open close door The toner cartridge does not supply enough toner e Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to dist
167. ce the sharpness degree Original Type Color Mode Low a High Oates CURD Sharpness Contrast 1 2 v Y OK X Cancel ee 3 Press OK from the display screen Changing Contrast This parameter can be used to make the original either crisper or smoother 1 Press the Image tab gt contrast from the display screen 2 Press left right arrow to enhance the contrast degree Original Type Color Mode Low High iii i ie Darkness 4 a paaa Sharpness Contrast 3 Press OK from the display screen Adjusting background Adjust the background to some extent by adjusting density or brightness You can lighten or delete the dark background of colored paper or newspaper to be scanned When you use this option Erase Backside Image in the Image tab are inactivated 1 Press the Image tab gt Adjust Background from the display screen Adjust Backaround m Off Erase Erase Backside Image Scan to Edge Auto X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Automatically adjusts background brightness e Enhance Darkens the background Use the left right arrows to toggle the values e Erase Lightens the background Use the left right arrows to toggle the values 3 Press OK from the display screen scanning_ 100 Erasing backside Images This feature prevents scanning the other side s image shown th
168. ce the tray pickup roller with a Samsung genuine pickup roller Replace with new MP pickup roller The life of the MP pickup roller expires totally Replace the MP pickup roller with a Samsung genuine MP pickup roller Staple cartridge of booklet is low Replace cartridge Small amount of staple cartridge of booklet is left The estimated life of staple cartridge is close Prepare a new staple cartridge for a replacement Right door is open Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place Staple cartridge of booklet is not installed Install the cartridge The staple cartridge of booklet is not installed or the staple cartridge is not properly installed Install the staple cartridge If it is already installed try to reinstall the staple cartridge If the problem persists call for service Scanner locked or another problem occurred The CCD Charged Couple Device lock has been locked Unlock the CCD lock Or turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Scanner The clock became initial time Set a time again The time setting of machine is initialized Set the time setting in Machine Setup Scan System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the scan system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service
169. cel O K General tab e Paper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes according to your requirements e Paper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick e Paper Source Select the source of the page By default it is Auto Selection e Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page e Duplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper e Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of paper e Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or an image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output HPGL 2 tab e Use only black pen To print all graphics in black e Fit plot to page Fit the entire graphic into a single page e Pen Width Change value to increase the thickness of pen lines By default it is 1000 Margins tab e Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected e Unit Change the units to points inches or centimeters Printer Specific Settings tab Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize va
170. ch application 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 2 Select Print directly using lpr 3 In the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties LPR GUI man ulation Coples Alpages Copies 1 100 h 3 w Even pages W Collate copies wv Odd pages mj Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 malaos NAMAMANA OR Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 bi 4 Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window Properties General Text Graphics Advanced Paper Options Paper Size Letter f Paper Type Printer Default f F Orientation Duplex Double Sided Printing Portrait None w Landscape A w Long Edge Book zj v Short Edge Tablet Banners Pages per Side N Up Start None 4 Normal 1 Up End None 4 w 2 Up w 4 Up Zi e General This option allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents It enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet e Text This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns e Graphics This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing image files such as color options image size or image pos
171. ch writer A z 0 9 Job Name Untitled A z 0 9 SAMSUNG C PoF Supplies LA tow Cancel him User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log in Mac OS X Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing documents at the same time If necessary you can load and print the stored documents You can find the stored file in the Document Box see Document box on page 167 Printer 10 88 181 197 iH fa Presets Standard m ns Copies 1 Collated C Two Sided Pages AII QO From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 H 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation LO Tas Job Setting a Print Mode Store and Print a aa loft User ID tech writer A z 0 9 Job Name Untitled A z 0 9 SAMSUNG Hore Gani Atom Cara Cam User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log in Mac OS X Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel Print Schedule Use this option to enter a specific time to print the job This is useful for printing large amount of data or if you want all your job to print at the same time Select the date and time you want to p
172. chine B remaining toner level and paper The information will vary based on the machine selected Some machines do not have this feature Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering 5 window You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window and click on any option for more information Advanced settings user interface overview The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing the network and machines Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Device Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation network and print information Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles e Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device e Basic tab Contains settings related general scan and device settings e Image tab Contains settings related to image altering Fax to PC Settings This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device e Disable If Disable is On incoming faxes will not be received on this device e Enable Fax Receiving from Device Enables faxing on the device and allows more options to be set Alert Settings Windows only This me
173. chine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Received Fax Printing gt Duplex from the display screen Duplex Auto Reduction Paper Source _ _ _ oe ee Output Tray Mark Ist Page Color Printing a Za s Staple Receive Header a a K7 Back 2 Press appropriate option e Off Prints only one side of the paper e Long Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the long edge e Short Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the short edge 3 Press OK Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax Faxing optional 118 Adjusting the document settings Before sending a fax you can adjust the document settings such as resolution darkness color duplex and so on Refer to explanation of this section l4 The document setting herein is for the current job only If you want to change the default settings on document settings refer to Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Default Value Selecting the size of originals A fax can be sent after specifying the original document size if the original document size cannot be detected aut
174. choose paper tray you want to use When printing on an envelope select the Envelope tab to set the options e Original Size This option allows you to set the actual paper size of the originals e Output Size This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the originals size see Fitting your document to a selected paper size on page 152 Percentage This option allows you to change the size of a page s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate see Change the size by percentage of your document on page 152 e Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Printing 142 Use MP Tray when printing on special materials such as envelopes and transparencies e Type This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Plain 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib Normal plain paper Thick 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib thick paper Heavy Weight 106 to 175 g m 29 to 46 Ib thick paper Extra Heavy Weight 1 176 to 216 g m 47 to 57 Ib thick paper Extra Heavy Weight 2 217 to 253 g m 58 to 67 Ib thick paper Thin 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib thin paper
175. cleaning unit Transfer belt unit is worn Replace it The life of the transfer belt unit expires totally Replace the transfer belt unit with a Samsung genuine transfer belt unit tray number cassette is pulled out Insert it properly The tray is not securely latched Close the tray until it locks into place tray number door is open Close it The tray is not securely latched Close the tray until it locks into place UI System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the Ul system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Video System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the CPU Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Waste Motor does not operate Turn off then on There is a problem in the waste motor Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Waste toner container is almost full Order new one The estimated life of the waste toner container is close Prepare a new waste toner container for a replacement Waste toner container is full Replace it The life of the waste toner container expires soon Replace the waste toner container with a Samsung genuine waste toner container see Replacing the waste toner container on page 199 Waste
176. clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 1 Open the right bottom door 3 Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door 3 Close the right bottom door Troubleshooting_ 217 Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 4 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 3 Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door Paper jam inside the machine Jam Registration Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door Troubleshooting_ 218 Paper jam inside of the machine Jam at Fuser out Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam Return AN The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the p Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam machine A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the 1 Open the right door machine 1 Open the right door 2 Pushing the lever several times Then remove the jammed
177. copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 4 Press the Basic tab or Back 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad on the control panel if necessary 6 Press Programs Copies 0001 a5 Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex Color Mode Auto Original 100 1 1Sided Auto Auto Tray 1 kj Tray 2 Tray 3 la more kaman Light Dark yout sM 7 Press Program Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the program name you want Press OK iH You can see the values of set Programs by scrolling up or down and check the values using the up down arrows 8 Press Save When the confirmation window appears the settings you set are saved Click Go to List or Close Using Programs 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Press Programs gt List 4 Press a program name you want to use on the list A Ready 1 Copies 0001 Copy gt Programs gt List test_3 Select All Detail Edit es nee 5 Press OK 6 Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to copy according to the setting you selected 7 Press Start from the control panel to begin copying Managing Programs 1
178. ctivates this feature 3 Press OK from the display screen Faxing optional 124 Using a programs setting This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the previous jobs Saving Programs 1 2 3 gt 6 T Press Fax from the display screen Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 Press the Basic tab Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 Press Programs s Address Book Recent Pause I q On Hook Programs Fax Line Resolution 4 Line b 4 Standard b Document a NG KANA _ Press Program Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the program name you want Then press OK l4 You can see the values of set Programs by scrolling up or down and check the values using the up down arrows Press Save When the confirmation window appears the settings you set are saved Click Go to List or Close Using Programs 1 2 or a i Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Fax from the display screen When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored f
179. d on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously 4 Click Properties 5 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 6 From the Scanner Properties window click Preview The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Scanning_ 107 7 8 Preview Pane Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview Pane Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections e Image Quality This option allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image e Scan Area This option allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select the option from the Job Type drop down list see Adding Job Type Settings on page 108 Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options When you finish click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning
180. d_20101026_1610859 m Preview Programs Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scanned output see Quality on page 101 Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format and resolution You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose see Scan Preset on page 101 File Format Selects the file format of the scanned output see File Format on page 102 File Name Makes the file name for the file to be sent see File Name on page 102 Back Returns to the Basic tab Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 1 10 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Scan to Email from the display screen Set scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 Press the Basic tab Press To s input area and Add Edit then pop up keyboard appears Enter the recipients email address you want see Entering email addresses by the pop up keyboard on page 86 iH You can also enter a recipients email address using Address Book or Recent see Entering email addresses by the address book on page 85 or Resending the latest email address on page 86 KO Pup Adcress Book printer samsuna com Scan from a Samsung MFP Document sent to you using a San Add Edit Cc
181. darkness on page 60 e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear e The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Image rubs off the copy easily e Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc WA If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thin paper see Opening printing p
182. dialed Also you can choose fax numbers instead of pressing the number key see Redialing the last number on page 115 e Pause Inserts a pause into a fax number e On Hook When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone see Sending a fax manually using On Hook on page 114 e Programs Allows you to save the current settings for future use see Using a programs setting on page 125 e Save Document Saves document on HDD in your machine see Saving documents on page 127 e l This button allows you to move to USB Copy Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to Advanced tab You can move to next or previous page using up down arrows at the bottom left Advanced Original Size Auto Ouplex 1 Sided Delay Send Off ety Sard aad Off naa 1 2 V aan Kakasa e Original Size Selects the size of the original see Selecting the size of originals on page 119 e Duplex Selects whether the machine sends faxes one side of the original or both sides of the original see Faxing on both sides of originals on page 119 e Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals see Selecting the orientation of originals on page 120 e Delay Send Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without your intervention see Delaying a fax transmission on page 11
183. differ from your machine depending on its options or models e The display screen image in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models e The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on the operating system of Windows XP Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media e Machine refers to printer or MFP The following table offers the conventions of this guide Convention Description Example Bold Used for texts on the display or button names on the machine Start Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function Z The date format may differ from country and feature to country Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical AN Do not touch the green underside of the damage toner cartridge Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute Cross reference Guides users to a reference page for additional detailed information see Finding more information on page 12 About this user s guide_ 11 Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or on screen Material name Description Installation Guide This guide provides info
184. dure is based on the Windows XP Professional SP3 Operating system Depending on operating sytems the procedure may be different or not permit access for unauthorized persons 1 Click on Windows Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy 2 Click on Local Policies gt Security Options 3 Change the below settings to Enabled e Network access Allow anonymous SID Name translation e Network access Let Everyone permissions apply to anonymous users policy Security Setting Rg Microsoft network client Send unencrypted password to third party SMB servers Disabled R8 Microsoft network server Amount of idle time required before suspending session 15 minutes Re Microsoft network server Digitally sign communications always Disabled Rg Microsoft network server Digitally sign communications if client agrees Disabled o Microsoft network server Disconne ients when logon ho expire nabled nal Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of 5AM accounts Enabled 2P Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts and shares Enabled 28 Network access Do not allow storage of credentials or NET Passports for network authentication Disabled Re Network access Let Everyone permissions apply to anonymous users Enabled tity Network access Named Pipes that can be accessed anonymously COMNAP COMNOD Rg Network access Remotely accessible registry paths System CurrentCo
185. e Paper jam inside of booklet maker 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only on page 229 Paper jam in tray 3 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray or high capcity feeder Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 3 on page 213 or Paper jam in optional high capacity feeder on page 215 Paper jam in tray 4 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 4 on page 214 Paper jam inside of finisher Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to top bin on page 223 or Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to main bin on page 224 Paper jam in MP tray Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Clear the jam see Paper jam in the multi purpose tray on page 216 Prepare new color black imaging unit The estimated life of the imaging unit is close Prepare a new imaging unit for a replacement Paper jam inside of finisher bridge Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam inside of finisher bridge on page 226 Prepare new color black toner cartridge Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing
186. e Understanding display messages on page 234 e The waste toner container is not installed in the machine or full waste toner container see Replacing the waste toner container on page 199 Blinking e A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message see Understanding display messages on page 234 When the problem is cleared the machine resumes its original task e The toner cartridge imaging unit or waste toner container is near the end of its life Order a new toner cartridge imaging unit or waste toner container You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner i Check the message on the display screen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chater see Understanding display messages on page 234 If the problem persists call for service Introduction 25 Turning the machine on Keep in mind that you should use the power cord supplied with the machine Otherwise it can cause damage or fire to the machine 1 Plug the power cord into the power receptacle Introduction 26 3 Turn on the main power switch Some parts inside of the machine may be hot when power is on or after printing Be careful not to burn yourself when working inside the machine Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on or plugged
187. e 10 to 90 RH a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing Specifications 250 Electrical specifications A Power requirements are based on the country region where the device is sold Do not convert operating voltages Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty Item CLX 9252 9352 Series SCX 8230 8240 Series Power rating 110 volt models AC 110 127V 220 volt models AC 220 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 1 100 W Ready mode Less than 250 W Low power mode Less than 50 W Less than 40 W Power save mode Less than 11 W Less than 7W Power off mode Less than 0 W Power Output Rating AC 110 127 V or AC 220 240 V for Scanner See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current Dehumidifying Heater The voltage rating of Scanner Dehumidifying Heater Kit or Cassette Dehumidifying Heater Kit is the same as the machine s voltage Kit or Cassette rating Dehumidifying Heater Kit a See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Specifications 251 Print media specifications print media weight Capacity Type Size Dimensions pgka KU capcity ee Plain paper Lett
188. e Advanced tab gt Duplex Scan Speed Press High to activate this feature Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying m UA Copying 73 Setting job completion notification When a copy job is completed this machine can send the completion notification using an email This feature is helpful for a large copy job You do not need to wait beside the machine until the copy job is completed l4 To recieve the job completion notification you need to set up network parameters and email settings using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For details about how to set up the network parameters and email settings refer to the Administrator s Guide on the supplied CD Copies 0001 Advanced mage Job Completion Notification Job Completion Notification Build Job An email notification wil be sent after Copy job completion 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad on the c
189. e Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press Advanced tab gt Original Size from the display screen 5 Select the original size i You can change the paper list on the display screen pressing Inch Size or mm Size The paper list is divided into the available A B size type and letter size type paper in this machine e Custom If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper press the cardinal point arrows to set the original size You can also set and save the custom size using Custom Size You can select the custom size whenever you need it Copies 0001 Orginal Size A4 Original a a Orientation 1 2 ID Copy AA P ee 25 43 N Up w 29i psi A5 5 ARINA Custom Size EF 1 14 w inch Size VOK X Cancel The custom size is different depending on where the originals are placed In the DADF On the scanner glass Minimum size 128 x 128 mm 25 x 25 mm 5 x 5 inches 1 0 x 1 0 inches Maximum size 297 x 432 mm 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 0 inches 11 7 x 17 0 inches e Auto Automatically detects the size of originals but this option is supported only when originals are Letter Ledger Legal Statement A3 A4 A5 B4 or JIS B5 sized e Mixed Size Allows the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several trays For example if the ori
190. e USB memory device using USB Capacity Trashes New Folder Yv 1 A a File Load demo3 Format s 5 Select the file format of the stored data by pressing the left right arrows from Format 6 Press Paste to send the stored data Document box_ 176 Printing stored data You can print the selected stored data 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 9 005 Kk comm x test Kk rele 3 File s 1 File 0 File Favoritel Favorite2 Favorite3 o boxes 001 002 003 004 a Common demo_i common test 6 File s 3 File s 3 File s 1 File 006 month weekly refere O File File O File O File 4 Select ir Save Document All Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box as a ee eo 6 File s 1 2 r y Send to Document Name Page Job Type Date 2010 05 11 fax_1 1 Fax 2010 05 11 demo3 1 Box 2010 05 11 2010 05 11 3 Press the appropriate option 1Fie 1 Page Copies Document Name Page v 1 a scan 1 1 Color Mode j i lt Color b o ooo Duplex Auto fit Off w OK Cancel e Copies Selects the number of copies e Color Mode Selects the color mode of copies e Duplex Selects the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper e Auto Fit Sets the auto fit option This machine reduces or enlarges the original based on t
191. e display screen To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and gently i To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals Original paper jam in front of scanner i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF LC Troubleshooting 201 4 Open the DADF 5 Open the DADF jam cover Original paper jam inside of scanner i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step Troubleshooting 202 6 Grasp the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner full Iling it usi hh l eerily a a iH Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 7 Close the DADF jam cover and the DADF Load the removed pages back into the DADF
192. e next guidelines Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Loading paper in the tray on page 37 Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media see Tray setting on page 47 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs a warning message appears on the display screen To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam Paper jam in tray 1 iH Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door Troubleshooting_ 210 4 Remove the jammed paper from the machine 5 Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step Close the right door
193. e settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Stamp from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Page Number This option allows you to print page numbers on the printouts e Time 8 Date This option allows you to print time and date stamps on the printouts e User ID This option allows you to print a user ID on the printouts e IP Address This option allows you to print a IP Address on the printouts 6 Press On to use the selected option 7 Set the Stamp settings e Pages Select to print the option on all pages or only the first page e Position Select the printed position of the text e Text Select the text color and size 8 Press OK from the display screen 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying 72 Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document l4 e This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e This copy feature is available only when you select Original 100 in Reduce Enlarge e When you use this option ID Copy and N Up in the Advanced tab are inactivated Copies 0001 Advanced mage Watermark e Poster Copy Off Copy to multiple sheet Overlay enlaraing the original image Stamp On PA
194. e that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default machine Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The front door is not closed Close the front door e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 210 e No paper is loaded Load paper see Loading paper in the tray on page 37 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different machine cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the Printing Pref
195. e using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again To change the 9 to for example 3 follow the steps below 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Recieve Start Code from the display screen 2 Press On to activate this feature 3 Enter number 3 using the numeric keypad on the control panel 4 Press OK Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Secure Receive from the display screen l4 The Secure Receive mode can only be configured by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine When the machine requests enter the ID and password 2 Press a fax line if your machine has multiple fax lines 3 Press On to active this feature iY When the machine receives a fax in this mode Print will be activated If you want to print the secured faxes pre
196. ead O X O Punched O O O Thin Cardstock o o o Thick Cardstock O a O Thin Glossy X X O Thick Glossy X X O Envelope X X O Transparency X X O Labels O X O a Optional high capacity feeder supports only A4 and Letter sized paper The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved e Plain 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib normal plain paper e Thick 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib thick paper e Heavy Weight 106 to 175 g m 29 to 46 Ib thick paper Archive 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib If you need to keep the print out for a long time such as archives select this option e Letterhead 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib e Punched 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib e Thin CardStock 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib cardstock e Thick CardStock 170 to 216 g m 45 to 57 Ib cardstock e Thin Glossy 106 to 169 g m 28 to 45 Ib glossy paper e Thick Glossy 170 to 253 g m 45 to 67 Ib glossy paper Envelope Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes To print an envelope place it with the flap side up S e When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m 16 I
197. ect Samsung Unified Driver gt Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes Rakesh Add Printar Remove Printer Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers tab View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window PAGA Driver Configurator Printors Ctasses 3k elected printer Local prinierfidie Model URI Switches to Printers configuration Shows all of the installed machine aee Shows the status model name and URI of your machine Selected printer Local printer ihe Model 1 Printers Configuration 2 Scanners Configuration To use the on screen help click Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator The printer control buttons are as follows e Refresh Renews the available machines list e Add Printer Allows you to add a new machine e Remove Printer Removes the selected machine e Setas Default Sets the current selected machine as a default machine e Stop Start Stops starts the machine e Test Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly e Properties Allow
198. ect it from the Favorites drop down list The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Favorites drop down list and click Delete To set a favorite as startup select the favorite you want to set as startup then click the Set as default button Scan settings The following scan options are available Image Type Allows you to chose the proper color settings for image scanning Resolution Allows you to choose the image resolution Document Size Allows you to choose the proper size of the scanned image Document Source Allows you to choose the place in which the original document will be loaded Prompt for additional pages If this check box is checked you can scan pages continuously This option is useful when you scan multi page documents and or when Document Source is set to Flatbed scanner glass In this case a sequence of scanned images is processed as a single document Pages to Scan Allows you to specify how many pages are to be scanned This option is available when Document Source is set to ADF Simplex ADF Duplex Short Edge and ADF Duplex Long Edge Preference The following scan options are available Auto crop image after preview If this option is checked the scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size Preview on program start If this option is checked the scanning area will be selected automatically a
199. ed data is kept in the box e Move The machine deletes the stored data after sending Selected File File PPP mmm mene mene 4 Press the destination box to where the stored data will be sent 5 Press Paste to send the stored data Document box_ 175 USB When you send stored data to server you can only send data which the JOB_ TYPE is Box Fax or Scan This feature is available only when the USB memory device is connected to the machine 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 1 File Favoritel Favorite2 Favorite3 5 boxes 002 003 004 0 demo_i commo stj 3 File s 3 File s j 1 File 006 006 007 008 releas morthi weekly refere OFie 1 Fie ORe OFie Detail Search 4 Select bel Save Document Eo 2 Press the stored data you want to send and press Send to 3 Press USB Press OK if e Copy The stored data is kept in the box e Move The machine deletes the stored data after sending Box gt Common a a a a ane ae 1 Copy Move w OK XxX Cancel amn aaan Q Preview Add 4 Select the folder where the scanned image will be stored If you do not select a folder scan image is stored in root fH e If you want to store the sent data in a new folder make a new folder in the USB memory using New Folder e You can format the USB memory device using USB Format e You can check the status of th
200. ed image at a later time automatically The scanned image is saved into the memory 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send gt On from the display screen Advanced Original Size Job Name Off Original DelayJob Orientation Start Time Delay Send On Hour 01 12 Minutes 00 59 v 1 Lad 34 la 4 FM e Book Scan a S Build Job 1 2 ma Y OK X Cancel 2 Press the Job Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the job name you want If you do not enter a job name the machine assigns the job name as DelayJob 3 Set the Start Time Z Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent You can set Start Time 15 minutes later from the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting to be 1 15 If the set time is incorrect the warning message will appear when the machine resets it to the current time 4 Press OK from the display screen Z If you want to cancel this feature press Off before sending is activated Scanning 97 Book scanning Use this feature to scan a book If the book is too thick lift the DADF until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the DADF If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DADF open i This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Scan from the display screen
201. ee Paper jam before booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only on page 231 Paper Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in the exit area Clear the jam see Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down on page 221 or Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face Up on page 222 Paper Jam inside of machine Paper has jammed inside of the machine Clear the jam see Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 1 on page 216 or Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 2 on page 217 or Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 3 on page 217 or Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 4 on page 218 or Paper jam inside the machine Jam Registration on page 218 or Paper jam inside of the machine Jam at Fuser out on page 219 Paper Jam in exit area or finisher bridge Paper has jammed in the exit area or finisher bridge Clear the jam see Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down on page 221 Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face Up on page 222 or Paper jam inside of finisher bridge on page 226 Paper jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 1 on page 210 Paper jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 2 on page 212 Paper jam inside of booklet maker Paper has jammed during booklet printing Clear the jam se
202. een and useful buttons Display screen The display screen on the control panel allows user friendly operation of the machine Once you press the home icon Q on the screen it shows the display screen The display screen image in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Z e cons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine e To switch to the next display screen press the right arrow on the display screen e Depending on the authentication setting the machine s users have to enter an ID and a password In this case the machine can only be used by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine Contact the machine s administrator e USB Enters the USB menu When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB is activated on the display screen see Using a USB memory device on page 164 e Copy Enters the Copy menu see Copying on page 50 e Fax Enters the Fax menu Fax is activated on the display screen by installing optional fax kit see Faxing optional on page 110 e Document Box Enters the Document Box menu see Document box on page 167 e Scan to Email Enters the Scan to Email menu see Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email on page 83 e Scan to Server Enters the Scan to Server menu see Scanning or
203. elect a tray in Paper source 6 Press the appropriate page order e Depending on the options you select the result will vary Refer to the below table before using the 2Up option K e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed e Ifyou do not press the Start button only the front side will be copied e If you press the Stop button the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready mode N up copying The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 32 pages onto one sheet of paper Z e When you use this option ID Copy Image Repeat Booklet Book Copy and Poster Copy in the Advanced tab are inactivated e When you use this option Auto Fit is the only available option for Copying_ 63 Origianl orientation Original orientation Direction of paper Available HONG Result DADF Scanner grass display screen feeding in the tray orientation In the DADF Upright Images LEF or SEF Left to Right Left to Right or A Right to Left 4a Right to Left In the DADF Sideways Images LEF or SEF ot Copying_ 64 Origianl orientation Original orientation Direction of paper Available Result DADF Scanner grass display screen feeding in the tray orientation In the DADF Sideways Images LEF or SEF Top to Down Top to Down a Upright Images LEF or SEF LA Or Down to Top
204. elect the page layout you want Specification of the page layout e Poster 2x2 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages e Poster 3x3 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages e Poster 4x4 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages 4 Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together 4 4 10 mm LS 10 mm 5 s the 4 tab select the Original size Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 7 You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together Printing booklets This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet iH e If you print using the Fold or Fold and Staple option with the booklet finisher you can only load the paper by short edge feeding in trays e f you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 JIS B5 Statement Executive A5 8K 16K Ledger Tabloid Extra A3 or JIS B4 sized print media 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Basic tab select Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Select Fold Method type If you print a document contai
205. elect the sequence order of printouts Collated Printouts in sets to match the sequence of originals Copying_ 56 Uncollated Printouts sorted into stacks of individual pages e Offset Printouts are stacked in sets by laying printouts side to side 4 This feature is available only when the standard or booklet finisher is installed Off Disables this feature On This feature can be used e Rotate Printouts are stacked criss crossed in sets K e This feature is available only when the standard or booklet finisher is not installed e This feature is available only with Letter and A4 sized print media Before using this feature you have to load the paper in the trays with SEF Short edge feed and LEF Long edge feed For example direction of paper feeding in tray 1 is SEF and direction of paper feeding in tray 2 is LEF Off Disables this feature On This feature can be used e Output Tray Select the output tray iH In CLX 9252 9352 Series the right tray face up is optional device In SCX 8230 8240 Series the Inner Tray optional Job Separator is optional device Right Tray If you need to print thick paper or if the paper repetitively jams in the exit area of the center tray use the right tray When you use the Duplex feature see Copying multiple sides on page 55 with the Right Tray as an output tray it could slow down the printing speed We recommend you to use other trays
206. end data which the JOB_ TYPE is Box Fax or Scan 1 Press Document Box gt Select a box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen c on test 3 File s 3 File s 1 Fie 006 006 007 008 releas mormthi weekly refere ore 1 Fie OFie OFie Detail Search Select bel Save Document aminn 2 Press a stored data you want to send and press Send to 3 Press Server and then press OK iY e Copy The stored data is kept in the box v e Move The machine deletes the stored data after sending 4 Press the server name s input area Press Add to enter recipients server address manually see Entering server addresses manually on page 90 Or you can use Address Book to enter the addresses easily see Entering server addresses from the address book on page 89 5 Select the file format of the stored data pressing the left right arrows from Format Press the Start button to send the stored data 6 While the machine is sending a stored data you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Box 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 demo_i common test 3 File s 3 File s 1 Fle releas mornhi weekly refere Ofe 1 File ORe Ofe Detail Search 2 Press the stored data you want to send Press Send to 3 Press Box and then press OK iY e Copy The stor
207. ending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server on page 87 e Scan to USB Scans and stores scanned output onto a USB memory device See Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB on page 93 Z If you want to use this feature you need to insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine e Scan to PC Scans and sends scanned output via the Scan and Fax Manager 2 program that is installed on your networked computer See Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC on page 105 Scanning 82 Scanning originals and sending through email scan to email You can scan originals and send the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email K To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters SMTP settings and Scan to Email settings using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For details about how to set up the network parameters and email settings refer to the Administrator s Guide on the supplied CD Understanding the Scan to Email screen Press Scan to Email in the display screen Basic tab ju Address Book kaaa Fror Scan from a Samsung MFP Recent a Document sent to you using a Samsun Add Edit Cc 0 Bce 0 Preview PAK aaa Attach a Programs Duplex Resolution a 4 1 Sided b 4 300 doi gt be Save Document a d Cia e To Enter the recipient s add
208. ent feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam inside of scanner on page 202 or Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path on page 204 Paper jam at exit of finisher bridge Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam at entrance of finisher on page 226 Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam see Paper jam bottom of duplex path Jam Duplex Regi on page 221 Output tray face down is full Remove printed media The output tray face down is full Remove papers from the output tray face down the machine resumes printing Paper Jam at the inside of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam see Paper jam at the inside of duplex path Jam Duplex 2 on page 220 Troubleshooting 237 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Paper Jam at the return of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam see Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex Return on page 219 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam see Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex 1 on page 220 Paper jam before booklet folding Paper has jammed during booklet printing Clear the jam s
209. er Troy 2 MP Trey Substitution a Tray Priority Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Setting 2 Press On 3 Press OK Auto continue This option allows you to continue printing when the paper size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray When this option is activated the machine continues printing using similar or large size paper If this option is inactivated the machine waits until the required size paper is loaded in the tray 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt Auto Continue Auto Continue Pa mamamana Paper Tray 2 MP Tray Sibatituton Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Naa Ad 2 Press On 3 Press OK Paper substitution When the requested paper for a print job is not available in the tray this feature allows you to substitute similar paper size For example if the requested ledger sized paper is not available in the tray this machine substitutes A3 for the requested paper When the paper is substituted some image loss may occur 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt Paper Substitution Auto Continue _ Paper Tray 2 MP Tray Substitution Tray Pronty Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Setting 2 Press On 3 Press OK Media and tray_ 48 Tray priority setting When you do not select the tray for printing the tray selected as in the Tray Priority Setting will be used in order If the tray does not have the paper
210. er on page 152 Finishing Options This option allows you to specify the number of staples or hole punches iY e The Staple option is available only when the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed e The Hole Punch option is available only when the optional punch kit is installed in the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher e Staple Select the number of staples between 1 Staple and 2 Staple e Hole Punch Select the number of hole punches between 2 Hole and 3 Hole Depending on the punch kit 4 Hole would appear instead of 3 Hole Paper tab Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications Click the Paper tab to display the options shown below amp Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Series Printing Preferences Basic Samsung i Paper mt Device A4 Cmm Coples 210x297mm inch Number of Copies Color Print Mode Normal Grayscale Collate Paper Options femme Paper Envelope Original Size Ag Output Size Same as Original Size Percentage loo 5 25 40096 Source Auto Select Type Printer Default Special Pages Transparency Separator Copies This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed in Color or Grayscale You can select 1 to 9999 copies e Collate If you check this option printouts in sets to match the sequence of originals Paper Options This option allows you to
211. er 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond Ledger 279 x 432 mm 11 x 17 inches e 520 sheets of 80g m 20 Ib e 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches ap Pba AE adi pong Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches bond for the high capacity Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches feeder A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 7 inches Ab 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches B4 257 x 364 mm 10 1 x 14 3 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches Tabloid Extra 305 x 457 mm 12 x 18 inches 8K 270 x 390 mm 10 75 x 15 5 inches 16K 195 x 270 mm 7 76 x 10 75 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High capacity feeder Envelope Letter Statement A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond ae JIS B5 A6 ISO capacity feeder 10 sheets stacking Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm 9 01 x 12 75 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain pap
212. er container expires totally the display screen shows the error message of replacing waste toner container Model Average yield Part name CLX 9252 Approx 75 000 images CLT W606 Series CLX 9352 Approx 75 000 images CLT W606 Series a Declared yield value in accordance with 5 coverage b Image counts are based on one color on each page If you print a document in full color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black the number of image is 4 images Model Average yield Part name l Lift the locking lever upward Then remove the waste toner container SCX 8230 Approx 300 000 pages MLT W606 SCX 8230 8240 Series Series SCX 8240 Approx 300 000 pages MLT W606 Series a Declared yield value in accordance with 6 coverage At this stage the waste toner container needs to be replaced 1 Open the front door 3 Remove the new waste toner container from its package Troubleshooting 199 4 Insert the new waste toner container until it locks in place 5 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate IZ Troubleshooting 200 Clearing original document jams When an original jams while passing through the duplex automatic document feeder DADF a warning message appears on th
213. er of only one type size and weight If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 210 Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 252 If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The paper keeps jamming There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 252 There may be debris inside the machine Open the front door and remove any debris If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Transparencies stick together in the paper exit Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensur
214. er section 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib bond 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib bond paper section e 400 sheets for each tray e 50 sheets stacking e 1 600 sheets for the high capacity feeder Heavy weight Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 106 to 175 g m 29 to 46 Ib bond 106 to 175 g m 29 to 46 Ib bond paper paper section e 350 sheets stacking e 1 400 sheets for the high capacity feeder e 20 sheets stacking Specifications 252 Type Size Dimensions print media weight Capacity tray1 2 3 4 High capcity feeder multipurpose tray Extra Heavy weight 1 Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 176 to 216 g m 47 to 57 Ib bond e 200 sheets stacking e Not available in the high capacity feeder 176 to 216 g m 47 to 57 Ib bond e 10 sheets stacking Extra Heavy Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 217 to 253 g m 58 to 67 Ib bond weight 2 paper section capacity feeder 10 sheets stacking Thin paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib bond 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib bond paper section e 520 sheets stacking e 100 sheets stacking e 2 000 sheets for the high capacity feeder Cotton Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond paper section 400 sheets
215. erences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct see Opening printing preferences on page 140 The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the machine software The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative Troubleshooting 241 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Continued The machine does not print The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen see Opening printing preferences on page 140 Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the contro
216. erent from the sample image s Low Moderatel Original Moderatel High y low y high 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying in a mirror image This feature allows you to copy in a mirror image Copies 0001 Ks Original Type NG irror Reverse the original image Erase Edge ike a mirror Sharpness On Contrast Mirror iw oa 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Press the Image tab gt Mirror from the display screen Press On to activate this feature Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying ND OU lt Copying_ 76 Adjusting background Erasing backside Images This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the When the original is thin and backside images are shown through you can background such as in newspapers or catalogs use this feature to remove the backside images Copies 0001 Adjust Background Adjust Background Erase Copy an original from a newspaper or magazine to adjust its bac
217. es and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 and Vista press Printing Preferences For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printing Preferences Y If Printing Preferences item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 5 Change the settings on each tab 6 Click OK K If you want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences Printing_ 155 Setting your machine as a default machine 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers e For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes e For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Select your machine 4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 if Set as default printer item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window Print General Select Printer Status Ready Pinte is Location Conert Page Range OA Number of copie
218. ess book This guide gives you guidelines for the address book This chapter includes e Setting up an address book using the control panel Setting up an address book using the control panel You can save frequently used fax numbers e mail addresses SMB server addresses FTP server addresses and WebDAV server addresses in your machine e Individual Stores up to 500 recipients information e Group Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations You can register up to 500 recipients in a group Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the Basic tab of Fax Scan to Email or Scan to Server Sending Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries You cannot register a group as you register an individual in a group Storing Individual address Fax E Mail 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book gt New gt Fax E Mail gt Individual are automatically choosed Group Name Untitled Favorite Speed Dial No W 17 A m n a te n o gt SMB WebDAV Emal 2 Press the Name input area Then enter the name of the recipient using the pop up keyboard Press OK Check Favorite for addresses you often use You can easily find them from the search results 3 Press the Fax No input area and enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel You have
219. essages on page 234 The screens below show an example animation ara Copies 000 Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex Color Mode Auto Original 100 1 1Sided Auto sa a zi Auto Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 l8 Programs brd Save Document Follow the instructions on the screen to solve the concerned problem Light E Dark low ATT Introduction 34 media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Loading paper in the tray Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or the duplex automatic document feeder DADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DADF If an original is detected in the DADPF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass Preparing originals e Do not load paper smaller than 25 x 25 1 0 x 1 0 inches or larger than 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 inches e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading 1 Open the DADF Printing on special media Tray setting 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with
220. ether a fax transmission and reception is successfully completed or not K If a report contains characters or fonts that the machine do not support Unknown could be printed instead of the characters fonts in the report 1 Press Machine Setup gt Report gt Fax Reports gt Settings from the display screen Multi Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Fax Reception Result Result History History gf gg BI On On On On a On Error On Error a w OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Multi Fax Transmission Result Prints a confirmation report when you send a fax to multiple locations Off Disables this feature On Activates this feature On Error Prints a report only when a transmission fails e Fax Transmission Result Prints a confirmation report showing whether a transmission was successful how many pages were sent and other information Off Disables this feature On Activates this feature On Error Prints a report only when a transmission fails e Fax Transmission History Prints a confirmation report whether a transmission was successful how many pages were sent and other information Off Disables this feature On Activates this feature e Fax Reception History Prints a confirmation report whether a reception was successful how many pages were received and other information Off Disables this feature On A
221. ettings Selecting the size of originals Faxing on both sides of originals Selecting the orientation of originals Changing the resolution Selecting the type of originals Selecting the color mode Changing the darkness Adjusting background Erasing backside images 123 Forwarding a fax to another destination 123 123 Understanding the Fax Forward Settings options Setting the fax forwarding 123 Setting the junk fax 124 Printing a fax report 125 Using a programs setting 125 125 126 126 Contents Saving Programs Using Programs Managing Programs Using previous settings 6 contents SETTING UP AN ADDRESS BOOK PRINTING 127 Saving documents 128 Setting up an address book using the control panel 128 Storing Individual address Fax E Mail 128 Storing Individual address SMB FTP WebDAV 129 Editing Individual address 129 Storing Group address 130 Editing Group address 130 Searching Address Book for an entry 131 Deleting an entry in an Address Book 131 Checking Address Book for an entry 132 Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service 132 Storing on your local machine 137 System requirements 137 Windows 137 Macintosh 137 Linux 138 UNIX 138 Introducing useful software programs 138 Samsung Anyweb Print 138 Printer driver features 138 PCL printer driver 138 XPS printer driver 139 PostScript printer driver 139 Basic printing 139 Canceling a print job 140 Opening printing preferences
222. etwork DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle Duty Cycle
223. ext copy job After finishing the current copy job the machine automatically restores the default settings or when you press the Clear button on the control panel Selecting the paper supply tray Paper Supply sets the tray containing the paper to be used for printing The machine prints the scanned image on the paper in the selected tray You can see the icons that show paper sizes and the remaining amount of paper in each tray Press the Basic tab 5 Paper Supply then press the appropriate paper tray Copies 0001 Beduce Eniarge Duplex Color Mode riginal 10026 1 1Sided Auto Programs Light po Dark Ka luto Mani AHEM bed Save Document e Auto Automatically detects the paper size with the paper tray When you use this option Image Shift in the Advanced tab is inactivated e Other preset values Check the paper size in each tray and press the tray containing the paper size you want Copies 0001 Paper Supply Reduce Enilarge Duplex Color Mode Tray 1 Original 100 1 1Sided Auto more Light o Dark Programs Couto ALLL bed Save Document The tray icons below represent remained paper in each tray 100 71 70 31 30 11 Under 10 Empty SS ISIS Copying_ 54 G N Copies 0001 Tray 3 amp Ad Tray bi Tray 4 Lad As D Letter BD Tray 2 amp MP Tray LJ D Emoty amp Reduc
224. f it has a problem The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it Cleaning the scan unit Troubleshooting 246 condition suggested solutions Common Windows problems The machine dials a The other fax machine may be turned off out of Condition Suggested solutions number but the paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak era m connection with the with the other machine operator and ask her him File in Use Exit all software applications Remove all other fax machine to solve out the problem message appears software from the printer s startup group then fails during installation restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver Faxes do notstorein There may not be enough memory space to General Protection Close all other applications reboot Windows memory store the fax If the display indicating the Fault Exception and try printing again memory status shows delete any faxes you no OE Spool 32 oe longer need from the memory and then
225. fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers iY e You can send a fax up to 10 destinations at once e To insert a pause press Pause at the appropriate place while entering the fax number appears on the display at the corresponding location Faxing optional 113 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations Z e You can send a fax directly from your computer see Using a fax in your computer on page 110 e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop on the control panel before the machine starts transmission Or press the Job Status button on the control panel and select the job you want to delete press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e fan original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window e While the machine is sending a fax you cannot send an email at the same time Sending a fax using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number you set previously see Setting up an address book on page 128 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading ori
226. faxing 119 original type copying 61 faxing 121 scanning 96 overlay printing create 153 154 delete 154 print 154 P paper supply tray copying 54 Index_ 264 poster print 151 PostScript driver features 139 troubleshooting 247 print media card stock 47 envelope 45 glossy 47 37 labels 46 47 output support 252 paper tab in printer preferences 142 setting the paper size 47 45 transparency 46 print resolution set Linux 161 print resolution set Macintosh 158 Windows 143 printer driver features 138 printer preferences Linux 161 using help 147 printer properties opening printer preferences 140 printer status general information 183 printing Banner Printing 154 changing the default print settings 155 152 fitting your document to a selected paper size 152 Linux 161 Macintosh 157 multiple pages on one sheet of paper Macintosh 160 Windows 151 poster 151 Windows 139 Macintosh 160 Windows 152 156 UNIX 162 using direct printing utility 155 153 152 printing a document Linux 161 Macintosh 157 UNIX 162 problems copying problems 245 paper feeding problems 241 240 243 touch screen 240 Q quality scanning 101 quick copy 81 R rear view 17 reports email confirmation report 86 fax report 124 resolution faxing 120 printing 143 scanning 96 S Samsung Printer Status 183 scan preset 101 scan sending delay sending 97 scan to email 83 scan to server 87 scanner gla
227. fer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib bond capacity feeder e 20 sheets stacking Labels Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond e 50 sheets stacking e 20 sheets stacking e Not available in the high capacity feeder Postcard PostCard 4 x 6 101 6 x 152 4 mm 4 x 6 inches Not available in tray1 2 3 4 High 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib bond capacity feeder e 20 sheets stacking Specifications 253 print media weight Capacity Type Size Dimensions EY Gag Ng GAPE multipurpose tray Tray 1 2 3 4 minimum size custom 139 7 x 210 mm 5 5 x 8 27 inches 60 to 216 g m 16 to 57 Ib bond Tray 1 2 3 4 maximum size custom 305 x 457 mm 12 x 18 inches Multipurpose tray minimum size 98 x 148 mm 3 87 x 5 82 inches 60 to 253 g m 16 to 67 Ib bond custom Multipurpose tray maximum size 320 x 1 200 mm 12 6 x 47 2 inches custom a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions b Optional high capacity feeder supports only long edge feed for Letter and A4 sized paper c The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 sheffield This means the numeric level of smoothness Specifications 254 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products cont
228. find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Enter Password If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the document box This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it e Print Schedule Use this option to enter a specific time to print the job This is useful for printing large amount of data or if you want all your job to print at the same time Print at Select the date and time you want to print Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Basic tab Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page Click the Basic tab to display the options shown below gt Printing Preferences eae Basic Paper Graphics Finishing Advanced Eco Samsung Paper Devke A4 Cmm 210x 297mm Qinch Print Mode Normal Portrait O Landscape C Rotate 180 Degrees Single Page Per Side None Printer Default O None O Long Edge O short Edge Printer Status Orientation This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page
229. for an output tray Inner Tray The inner tray is efficient for separating the printouts Copying_ 57 For example if you want to avoid received faxes mixing with copy or print outputs you can use this inner tray to separate the received faxes Center Tray The machine sends output to the center tray by default When the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed you can use more output trays Copy gt Output Copies 0001 Right Tray Top Tray Finishing Tray i NY Mapa iray gt GE iT finishing Tray aa u V OK X Cancel k e Top Tray Paper sizes not supported by the finishing tray automatically gets printed out in the top tray e Finishing Tray When the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed the machine sends output to the finishing tray by default Staple You can staple printouts and adjust the stapling position l4 e The Staple feature is available only when the standard or booklet finisher is installed e When you use the Staple feature only the finishing tray is available for printouts e When the printout is only one page the Staple feature does not work e When you have set the the Punch options before setting the Staple options some options are not available depending on the staple position and the direction of paper feeding in the trays e When printing multiple copies of a job using the Staple feature it is recommend to mo
230. front door iY correctly When the bridge covers are not inserted correctly it could If this paper jam persists make sure the bridge covers are inserted Cause paper jams and hole punch positions askew Troubleshooting 229 5 Insert the booklet maker ZY 6 Close the finisher front door 3 Lift up and hold the booklet entrance guide 4 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Troubleshooting 230 3 Turn the knife wheel several times in the direction of the arrow 4 Open the booklet maker cover Paper jam before booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Pull out the booklet maker Troubleshooting 231 5 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 7 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out O en 6 Turn the fold wheel in the direction of the arrow until you can remove the jammed paper 9 Close the finisher front door Troubleshooting 232 Paper jam after booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet 3 Turn the knife wheel several times in t
231. g Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures e Document Scanning Use for scanning documents with text or text and images e Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format e Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner e Favorites User created favorites for frequently used scan settings Management tools_ 184 SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety of social networking sites SNS Scan an image directly or select an existing image to upload to Facebook Flickr Picasa Google or Twitter see Scanning to a Social Networking Site on page 185 4 SNS Upload will only be available after Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 has been installed http Awww microsoft com download en details aspx id 22 and Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7 0 or higher are required E Book Provides the ability to scan multiple Conversion documents in as one e book or convert existing files into an e book format epub file see Converting to an E Book on page 185 Send Fax Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is installed see 6 Using a fax in your computer on page 110 iY If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not installed this will be grayed out Configuration Provides the options for a Common and Quick Scan
232. g you can choose only Top 3 Holes Three holes are punched in the left right or top When the loaded paper is short edge feeding you can choose Left or Right while the loaded paper is long edge feeding you can choose only 1 Top Changing the darkness Press the Basic tab You can adjust the degree of darkness using the 3 left right arrows This feature allows dark images to be printed into lighter images or light images into darker images Copies 0001 Hle Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex Color Mode Auto Original 100 1 1Sided Auto 8 Auto Tray 1 t Tray 2 les Tray 3 les more Programs Light Dark ee as Output Ahh Im Save Document Refer to the sample images below Depending on the circumstances and quality of originals the printout s quality could be different from the sample image s Light Moderatel Original Moderatel Dark y dark Copying 60 Copies 001 Basic B oo Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex Color Mode Auto Original 100 1 1Sided Auto mee 4 AA A3 AG gt Auto Tray 1 le Tray 2 Tray 3 more Programs Light w Dark re TU Output HIHHH Save Document i Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see
233. ginal paper jam in front of scanner Original paper jam inside of scanner Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path Original paper jam in exit area of scanner Original paper jam in duplex exit area of scanner Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams Paper jam in tray 1 Paper jam in tray 2 Paper jam in tray 3 Paper jam in tray 4 Paper jam in optional high capacity feeder Paper jam in the multi purpose tray Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 1 Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 2 Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 3 Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 4 Paper jam inside the machine Jam Registration Paper jam inside of the machine Jam at Fuser out Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex Return Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex 1 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path Jam Duplex 2 Paper jam bottom of duplex path Jam Duplex Regi Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face Up Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to top bin Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejection to the top bin Paper jam inside of finisher during ejecting to main bin Paper jam at finisher s exit during ejecting to main bin Paper jam inside of finisher bridge Paper jam at entrance of finisher Paper jam around puncher of finisher Paper jam at entrance of booklet maker 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only Paper j
234. ginals on page 35 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 6 When the cursor is blinking in the input line e Fora one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit button using the numeric keypad on the control panel e Fora two or three digit speed dial number press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button using the numeric keypad on the control panel 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to the destination Sending a fax manually using On Hook This method is sending a fax using On Hook in the Basic tab When you use Delay Send and Priority Send in the Advanced tab you cannot send a fax using On Hook 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Fax from the display screen Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 Press the Basic tab Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 Press On Hook on the display screen When you hear the dial tone enter a fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel 8 Press Sta
235. ginals total 3 pages the 1st page is letter sized paper the 2nd page is legal sized paper and the 3rd page is letter sized paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and letter in order from several trays Mixed Size is activated when the originals are placed in the DADF e Other preset values You can select the size of original directly by pressing the buttons 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Selecting the orientation of originals When copying double sided documents or making double sided copies or combined copies specify the document orientation otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement Copies 0001 Advanced Original Size Upright Images Original Orientation ID Copy Sideways Images A N Up Image Repeat 4 wv Va O X Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press Advanced tab gt Original Orientation from the display screen 5 Select the orientation of the original document e Upright Images Select this setting for an
236. hange Name Preview Folder Creation Off Programs 1 1 K Back bel Save Document Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scanned output see Quality on page 101 Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose see Scan Preset on page 101 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output see File Format on page 102 File Policy Automatically renames or overwrites when the USB memory device has the same name file see File Policy on page 102 Folder Creation Automatically create a new folder for storing the scanned image see Folder Creation on page 103 Back Returns to the Basic tab Scanning to a USB memory device iH e The machine cannot detect the unformatted USB memory device 11 Scanning 94 Format and then reinsert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine e The machine could not detect the USB memory device when the machine is in power save mode Wait until the machine returns to ready mode and then reinsert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine e The machine has two USB memory ports When a USB memory is already inserted to one of the port if you try to insert a USB memory device to another port the machine cannot detect second one Remove the USB memory device which is inserted first and then reinsert the USB memory device you want to
237. he settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Image tab gt Sharpness from the display screen 5 Press the left right arrow to change the level you want Copies 0001 Original Type Erase Edge V Low High v Sharpness Led i Na Contrast Refer to the sample images below Depending on the circumstances and quality of originals the printout s quality could be different from the sample image s Low Moderatel Original Moderatel High y low y high 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying 75 Changing the contrast Set this parameter to adjust the contrast between Low and High 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Image tab gt Contrast from the display screen 5 Press the left right arrows to change the level A rana 7 Copies 0001 cali Original Type Erase Edge Low a High aa w OTE Contrast Mirror 1 2 wv Refer to the sample images below Depending on the circumstances and quality of originals the printout s quality could be diff
238. he Auto Document Delete setting can be edited in the Common box 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login IZ If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will be automatically logged out 7 Click Box 8 Select the box you want to edit 9 Click Edit Box The Edit window appears F Make To Secured Box ly Cancel General Box No Box Name common image Favorite Favorite1 Auto Document Delete off 10 Change the box settings 11 Click Apply IZ Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Add window is closed Delete Box You can delete a created box iY The Common box cannot be deleted not even by an administrator 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows i If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru
239. he USB memory port on your machine e The machine could not detect the USB memory device when the machine Is in power save mode Wait until the machine returns to ready mode and then reinsert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine e The machine has two USB memory ports When a USB memory is already inserted to one of the port if you try to insert a USB memory device to another port the machine cannot detect second one Remove the USB memory device which is inserted first and then reinsert the USB memory device you want to insert into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press USB from the display screen 3 The machine shows all files in the USB memory device Select the file you want to print You can also select multiple files if you want to print a number of files iY e Ifthe file is in a folder press the folder name Then press Select e If the PDF file you selected is secured with a password you have to know the password for printing Enter the password Using a USB memory device_ 165 when the machine requires the secure password If you do not know the password the print job will be cancelled 4 Press USB Print 5 Press the appropriate option e Copies Selects the number of copies e Color Mode Selects the color mode of copies e Duplex Selects the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper e Auto fit Allows you to scale your print job to the selected paper size in the tr
240. he direction of the arrow finisher only Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher front door 4 Turn the fold wheel in the direction of the arrow until you can remove the jammed paper Troubleshooting 233 5 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Understanding display messages Messages appear on the display screen to indicate the machine s status or errors Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you troubleshoot problem Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order i e If amessage is not in the table reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service e When you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e color indicates the color of toner or imaging unit e tray number indicates the tray number e media type indicates the media type e media size indicates the paper size 6 7 Close the finisher front door e error number indicates the error number Message Meaning Suggested solutions Actuator Fan Failure error numbe
241. he multi purpose tray Load paper in the multi purpose tray Input System Failure error number Check the HCF connection There is a problem in the high capacity feeder Open and close the high capacity feeder or check the high capacity feeder connection with the machine If the problem persists call for service Paper is low in tray number Load paper Running out of paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Input System Failure error number Pull tray number out and insert it There is a problem in the tray Open and close the tray If the problem persists call for service Paper jam after booklet folding Paper has jammed during booklet printing Clear the jam see Paper jam after booklet folding 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only on page 233 ITB Unit Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the image transfer belt unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Paper jam around puncher of finisher Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam around puncher of finisher on page 228 Paper jam at entrance of finisher Paper has jammed during finishing Clear the jam see Paper jam at entrance of finisher on page 226 MSOK System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine
242. he size of the output paper e Paper Supply Sets a tray that contains the paper to be printed 4 Press OK to begin printing Printing information of stored data You can print information of the selected document box 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 9 005 comm pd test rele 3 File s 1 File 0 File Favorite Favorite2 Favorites 5 boxes 002 UUs a Common demo_i common testi 6 File s 3 File s 3 File s 1 File 005 006 007 i m t weekl fer File File IF File Detail Search Select bel Save Document pana NAA Se Fax StoredJob Scan Box kaman aaa semen G a 6 File s 1 2 Document Name Page Job Type Date scan_l 1 Scan 2010 05 11 1 2 fax 1 Fax 2010 05 11 Print List demo3 1 Box 2010 05 11 demo2 2010 05 11 General information and stored data of the selected document box gets printed out iH If you select a job type the printout shows the document list of the selected job type For example you select Box the printout shows the document list of Box job Al Copy Fax StoredJob Scan ees ae 3 File s 1 1 Document Name Page Job Type Date demo3 1 Box 2010 05 11 demo2 I Box 2010 05 11 Print List demo Box 2010 05 11 Q Add K7 Back Document box 177 Combining stored data
243. hostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem The machine does not appear on the scanners list e Ensure your machine is attached to your computer connected properly via the USB port and is turned on e Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Linux Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response This usually happens when starting a scan procedure An appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0O corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you ca
244. ies Genaral Connection Driver Jobs Glasses The following five tabs display at the top of the window e General This option allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration e Connection This option allows you to view or select another port If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the machine port in this tab e Driver This option allows you to view or select another machine driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options e Jobs This option shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the Job list e Classes This option shows the class that your machine is in Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected Printing 161 class Changing the printer settings 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties The UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select window various print options in printer Properties The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK and A UNIX Printing for Apply and C for Cancel Proceeding the print job After installing the printer choose any of the image text PS or HPGL
245. igianl orientation Original orientation Direction of paper Available punch Result DADF Scanner grass display screen feeding in the tray position In the DADF Upright Images Long Edge Feed LEF Left or Right Left Right Gi A Ni fo a a N On the scanner grass Ki Sideways Images LEF Top ca Upright Images Short Edge Feed SEF Top LA Sideways Images SEF Left or Right la In the DADF Upright Images LEF Top LA Sideways Images LEF Left or Right ca Upright Images SEF Left or Right LA Sideways Images SEF Top i 1 XxX I Copying_ 59 Z e The hole punch function is available only when the punch kit is Proof copying installed in the optional standard or booklet finisher This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one e Numbers of punched holes are depending on the punch kit copy first to check the quality then print the rest of copies later You can purchase the 2 3 hole punch kit or 2 4 hole punch kit e When you use the punch feature only the finishing tray is available for printouts e When you have set the the Staple options before setting the Punch options some options are not available depending on the number of staples staple position and the direction of paper feeding in the trays Off Disables this feature 2Holes Two holes are punched in the left right or top When the loaded paper is short edge feeding you can choose Left or Right while the loaded paper is long edge feedin
246. iginals and sending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server on page 87 e Scan to USB Enters the Scan to USB menu When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine Scan to USB is activated on the display screen see Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB on page 93 e Machine Setup You can browse current machine settings or change machine values g Some menus are only configured by an administrator or an authorized user who has registered ID and password on the machine by administrator When the machine requests enter the ID and password e Toner Info Shows the amount of toner used e LCD Brightness Adjusts brightness of the display screen Cd Changes the display language on the display screen mx When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine this is activated on the display screen When you want to remove USB memory from the machine press this button and Stop f e Quick Copy Enters the Quick Copy menu see Using the Quick Copy menu on page 81 e Scan to PC Enters the Scan to PC menu see Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC on page 105 e SmarThru WorkFlow In order to use this menu SmarThru WorkFlow should be installed For more information contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine Counter button When you press the Counter button on the control pa
247. ile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to
248. in calendars e Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing 4 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Change the size by percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want I gt 9 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Paper tab Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size 4 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate Go iY You cannot use this feature when you select a size of paper from the Output Size 5 Select the Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Fitting your document to a selected paper size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size This option can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document p SS Se Se ee ee eee 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Paper tab 3 Select actual paper si
249. in Box Property e Public All users scan use the box e Secured Set up the password to prevent unauthorized persons from accessing 4 Press the appropriate option in Auto Document Delete After deleting files the files cannot be restored e 1 Day 30 Days Set up the period for which stored data are in the box After the period the stored data get automatically deleted e Never Do not delete the stored data 5 Press the Favorite Box option if necessary If you set Favorite 1 Favorite 2 and Favorite 3 your machine displays them in Document Box l4 You can set only three favorite boxes If all favorite boxes were selected a warning message appears 6 Press OK from the display screen Edit Box You can change the settings of a created box K Only the Auto Document Delete setting can be edited in the Common box 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Box Setting gt Edit Box from the display screen Search for Box No EP R AA AC AA v 8 A i reference New Box Nasaan Box Name reference Box Property Edit Box Secured Auto Document Delete iday 2days 3days 7days 30days Never S mwr Delete Box Favorite 80x None Favoritel Favorite2 Favorite3 o Ss ee w OK XxX Cancel 2 Select the box number you want to edit using the up down arrows 3 Press the Box Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the b
250. incorrect a warning message will appear when the machine resets it to the current time 10 Press OK to save the setting 11 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to store the scanned original data into memory To cancel delaying a fax press Off before sending is activated Faxing optional 115 Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax needs to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished Priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts Z e When you use this option Delay Send in the Advanced tab are inactivated e When you use this option you cannot send a fax using the On Hook button on the display screen 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 6 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Addre
251. indow asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window e While the machine is sending a fax you cannot send an email at the same time Faxing optional 126 Saving documents You can save the scanned originals to Document Box the machine s HDD in your machine The documents saved in Document Box can be printed if necessary l4 e For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter see Document box on page 167 e If important data is stored in the Document Box we recommend you to backup the data regulary Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 6 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers 7 Press Save Document s fe Address ii Book Recent Pause It On Hook Programs Fax L
252. ine 6 Click Login K If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Check an address you want to edit and press Edit The Edit window appears 9 Change the address information 10 Click Apply K Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Edit window is closed Deleting addresses in Individual Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows iY If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login iW If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Check an address you want to delete and click Delete If you check the column headers check box all addresses are checked Click OK when the confirmation window appears Searching addresses in Individual Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access
253. ine Resolution d Line 1 b 4 Standard gt bel bve Document ee Ng er panem 8 Press Fax amp Store or Store only e Off Disables this option e Fax amp Store Faxes and stores scanned originals e Store Only Stores scanned originals only 9 Press File Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the file name you want Press OK File Name itled Off 8 boxes Type Box Name al Fax amp Store Store only test_image 2 demo_image v Xx Cancel 1 2 COMMON _Image 10 Select a destination box and press OK File Name fax_job1 Off ss 8 boxes m Fax amp Store Type Box No Box Name 1 2 COMMON uIMage Store only 4 test_image 2 demo_image v w OK Cancel 11 Press Start from the control panel to begin scanning and sending a fax and storing or storing only If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window iH e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop on the control panel before the machine start transmission or press the Job Status button on the control panel and select the job you want to delete Press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is sending a fax you cannot send an email at the same time Faxing optional 127 setting up an addr
254. ing an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Managing Programs 1 Press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB from the display screen 2 Press Programs gt List 3 Press the appropriate option No Program Name Select All Detail Edit Delete VY OK Cancel e Select All Selects all programs for deleting all e Detail Displays detailed information of the selected program e Edit Changes the name of the selected program e Delete Removes the selected programs 4 Press OK Using previous settings 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB from the display screen 3 Press Programs 4 Press a previous setting you want to use Scanning 103 For example if you want to use the settings from the last job press Previous 1 5 Press OK 6 Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected 7 Press the Start button to scan and send the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window Z e Tocancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete cu
255. ing is completed the screen displays the search results 8 Select the email address you want from the search results and press Ok When you enter an email address using Address Book the address book icon U displays in the email address input area You can delete an email address pressing the delete icon x Entering email addresses by the pop up keyboard The following procedure is an example of entering abcdefg abc com 1 Press Scan to Email from the display screen 2 Press To or From s input area and Add Edit then pop up keyboard appears ey KI EI E w s grd arf x Hc Press a b c d e f g Press Press a b c Press and press c O m Press OK after entering all the contents 4 OL a o Press the delete icon x to delete an email address entered Resending the latest email address To resend to the latest used email address 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email from the display screen 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Press To s input area and Recent 6 Press the email address which you want to re send Then press OK l4 e Add to Address Allows you to add an email address in the Recent results to the Add
256. ing or enlarging copies Using the Reduce Enlarge feature allows you print an original image reducing or enlarging it to the paper You can press the icons that show how to reduce and enlarge copies Also if you press the More button you can reduce or enlarge by 1 between 25 and 400 to print a copy Press the Basic tab gt Reduce Enlarge then press the appropriate option to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper When you use this option Booklet and Poster Copy in the Advanced tab are inactivated Copies 0001 Duplex Color Mode 1 1Sided Auto g Paper Supply Reduce En Auto Original 100 11596 B4 A3 more aen Programs Light z Dark SII e Original 100 Prints texts or images the same size as originals e Auto Fit Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper e Other preset values Check the image and value on each icon and press the one you want to use You can also adjust to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper with the More button Bi Output is lm Save Document Copies 0001 zz i a lt Enlarge gt Bi Onginak 100 1 4 saman SE 8696 A4 B5 bv 100 4 122 A4 B4 v vV OK 2 Cancel Bj lt Reduce gt 86 A3 B4 You can select an option by pressing a button in the Reduce and Enlarge list You can also reduce or enlarge by 1 between 25 400 to print a copy using the left right arrow
257. ing the color mode Use one of these options to scan the original among Auto Color Gray or Mono 1 Press the Image tab gt Color Mode from the display screen Select the appropriate option and press OK Original Type Auto Mono Color Mode Darkness Color Sharpness Gray Contrast ee 1 2 v Y OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Auto Automatically detects the color of the original and scan it e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel 3 Press OK from the display screen Scanning 99 Changing Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker 1 Press the Image tab gt Darkness from the display screen 2 Press to enhance the darkness degree Original Type Color Mode Low High Darkness KM il J q l gt Sharpness Contrast 1 2 V 3 Press OK from the display screen Changing Sharpness You can set the parameter to emphasize the edges of text so that they can be read more easily This parameter can also be used to adjust the original image 1 Press the Image tab gt Sharpness from the display screen 2 Press left right arrow to enhan
258. insert into the USB memory port on your machine Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Scan to USB from the display screen Press the Basic tab C3 USB gt STICK 4 File s 6 Folder s 1 2 Pages CI pm 1 2 fa image Temporary Wasserlili Trashes Spotign 4 Select New Folder Detail Edit Delete Preview kama PAA AHE Fil ile Name ma Duplex Resolution 4 Sided 300 dpi gt bal Save Document b l4 V d e aaa Select a folder for scan image stored If you do not select a folder the scanned image is stored in root Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs if necessary see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 Press the File Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter a file name to store the scan data Press OK Press the Start button to scan and store the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window After scanning is complete you can remove
259. ions The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use l4 e Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine in use However the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications see System requirements on page 137 e When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark 63 or sy An exclamation mark ata means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and 3 mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications Z Macintosh basic printing see Macintosh printing on page 157 Linux basic printing see Linux printing on page 161 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP Your Printing Preferences window may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list Y am General Select Printer Status Ready CI Print to fae Localior Comment Find Printer Printer Page Range All Number
260. ip holder e Viewing the animation for trouble shooting Machine overview Front view 1 Duplex automatic document feeder cover Optional dual cassette feeder tray 3 tray 4 Duplex automatic document feeder width guides Standard tray tray 1 tray 2 Duplex automatic document feeder input tray Front door Sows Hd O Duplex automatic document feeder output tray Front door handle Introduction 15 5 Multi purpose tray 12 Control panel 5 Standard tray right bottom door 13 Center tray Optional dual cassette feeder right bottom door a Optional device Front view 2 1 Scanner glass 5 Power switch 2 White sheet 5 Power receptacle 3 Multi purpose tray USB port 2 EA 4 Multi purpose tray paper width guide Introduction_ 16 Rear view Network 1 Optional dual cassette feeder cable 5 USB host port 2 Duplexing automatic document feeder cable 5 Finisher connector 3 Scanner locking screw Network port 4 USB port Introduction 17 Inner view CLX 9252 9352 Series WIN za AL Off 3 Imaging units 1 Waste toner container 4 Inner cover If you want to see the imaging unit you need to remove the waste toner container Hold the left right locking levers and push outward Then remove the waste 2 Toner cartridges toner c
261. ipt job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional dual The printer driver Open the PostScript cassette feeder tray has not been driver properties select 3 tray 4 is not configured to the Device Options tab selected in the recognize the and set the tray option of driver optional dual the Tray Options cassette feeder section tray 3 tray 4 When printing a The resolution Make sure that the document in setting in the printer resolution setting in your Macintosh with driver may not be printer driver matches Acrobat Reader 6 0 matched with the the one in Acrobat or higher colors one in Acrobat Reader print incorrectly Reader Troubleshooting_ 247 Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not open Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the machine is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains Stopped string press the S
262. isplay screen Original Type Color Mode EES Darkness Text Photo Cc SAAN Adjust Background Erase Backside Image X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Text For originals with text or line art e Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photograph 3 Press OK from the display screen Selecting the color mode You can transmit a fax in color using this feature 1 Press the Image tab 5 Color Mode from the display screen Original Type Color Color Mode Darkness Adjust Background Erase Backside Image X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white e Color Transmits a fax in color 3 Press OK from the display screen Changing the darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document 1 Press the Image tab gt Darkness from the display screen Original Type Color Mode Darkness KM j Il i gt Adjust Background Erase Backside Image 1 1 VOK X Cancel PAN AA NN NAMA 2 Press left right arrow to change the level of light and dark 3 Press OK from the display screen Adjusting background You can lighten reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals If an original background is colored the background of the transmission data becomes bl
263. ith a front cover The front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the document e Back Cover Prints the document with a back cover The back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the document e Front and Back Cover Prints the document with a front cover and a back cover The covers can be blank papers or the first and the last pages in the document e Transparency Separator This option allows you to place a blank sheet between transparencies Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printer 10 88 181 197 Ta fa Presets Standard Copies i M Collated Two Sided Pages MA f Ng QO From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 FRA 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation ku Layout a Pages per Sheet 4 Na Layout Direction PAi Ss 1 la PN a lofi ned foe LJ Lb L J Border None 4 Two Sided Off 3 Reverse Page Orientation CF7 Copies A tow Cara rene 3 Select the other options you want to use 4 Click Print then machine prints the selected number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printing on
264. ition e Advanced This option allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel o Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 Type Ipr sfile name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only Ipr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open 2 n the LPR GUI window select your machine from the list and change the print job properties 3 Click OK to start printing Configuring Printer Properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window appears Printer Propert
265. job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP n
266. jos Shows the port type device connected to the port and status e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port or USB port Since the machine contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers talk to their devices via so called machine ports The current status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the machine device while another block is in use When you install a new machine onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for machine s functionality For machine scanners I O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Management tools_ 187 troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Redist
267. ke sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network and Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 is installed on the computer 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Press Scan to PC from the display screen 4 Select your computer name and press OK If the machine requests to enter a password enter the password using the numeric keypad on the control panel IZ e Password is the 4 digit number registered from Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 e If you want to set or change the password set or change it in the Setting menu of Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 see Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 on page 105 5 Press the application program you want and press Select Default setting is My Documents iY To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 gt Properties gt Set Scan Button see Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 2 on page 105 6 Set the scan quality with Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab 7 Set the size of origianl in the Advanced tab If you are not sure the original size select Auto 8 Set the color mode in the Image tab 9 Set the file format in which the image is to be saved in the Output tab File Format activates only when you select the application program as My Documents
268. kground Erase Backside Image Negative Image Auto Color Adjustments ee Enhance _ A 2 2 Y OK X Cancel Na Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 Press the Image tab gt Adjust Background Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copies 0001 Adjust MAG Aa tides Background ae Erase Backside Off mage Erase Backside g Image Prevent copying the original s image shown through on the backside Negative Image Erase Color Adjustments Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy o
269. l y existing document Stamp Confidential Urgent a a Poster Copy lt Custom gt ny Draft Duplex Scan Speed a 34 w MGA OK XX Cancel PA U 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Watermark from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Other preset values Allows you to easily select values commonly used Copies 0001 Advanced mage Watermark Off Top Secret All Pages Overlay a 1st page Only Stamp pa Confidential Urgent Text Color Size es A Normal a ad ad Poster Copy lt Custom gt An S Draft Ouplex Scan Center Speed a 3 4 v VY OK X Cancel e Custom Allows you to enter a text message using the pop up keyboard 6 Set the Watermark settings e Pages Select to print the option on all pages or only the first page e Text Color Size Select the text message color and size e Position Select the printed position of the text message 7 Press OK from the display screen 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Overla
270. l notification after the scan to email job is completed see Setting job completion notification on page 98 Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab Output tab You can move to next or previous page using the up down arrows pps located at the bottom left G Original Type Text Color Mode Auto Darkness Level 5 Sharpness Level 5 Contrast Level 5 Programs 1 2 v m Back H Save Document mama Original Type Selects whether the original is text photo etc see Selecting the type of originals on page 99 Color Mode Adjusts the color options of scanned output see Selecting the color mode on page 99 Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of scanned output see Changing Darkness on page 100 Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness level of scanned output see Changing Sharpness on page 100 Contrast Adjusts the contrast level of scanned output see Changing Contrast on page 100 Back Returns to the Basic tab Adjust Background Erase the background to some extent by adjusting density or brightness see Adjusting background on page 100 Erase Backside Image Prevents scanning the other side s image shown through the original paper see Erasing backside Images on page 101 Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge see Scan to Edge on page 101 Back Returns to the Basic tab Scanning 84 Quality Normal Scan Preset Custom File Format POF Gn File Name Untitle
271. lay screen 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Press the server name input area you can enter a recipient s server address manually You cannot enter address in the 2 before entering address in the 1 see Entering server addresses manually on page 90 You can also use Address Book to enter the addresses easily see Entering server addresses from the address book on page 89 6 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window IZ e Tocancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is sending a scanned data you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Entering server addresses Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book see Setting up an address book on page 128
272. left right arrows until Group appears You can see the Group list only 4 Group Search 2 Result s p 1 Pages E Name Type Favorite KG BR am CA Sa company ig Croup Total 2 i eS l visitor ago Group Total 4 SelectAll New Close 3 Press the Search input area and enter the name using the pop up keyboard Press OK l4 If you are not sure of the name you can enter the first few letters 4 Press Search display screen displays the search results setting up an address book_ 130 Deleting an entry in an Address Book You can delete the selected address which currently stored in address book 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book from the display screen 2 Press the address you want to delete Press Delete 4 Index gt ABC DEF GH JKL MNO gt 20 Result s Individual Individual Prdividuel SelectAll New Detail Edit Delete 3 Press OK when the confirmation window appears The selected address will be deleted from the list Checking Address Book for an entry You can see an individual or group address information 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book from the display screen 2 Press the address you want to see Press Detail The display screen shows all information of the address Index ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO 20 Result s 5 Pages Name Type Favorite 1 5 iY You c
273. ller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The machine does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options iY It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem
274. llowing e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications see Print media specifications on page 252 e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper l4 e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user s guide and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of the sheets characteristics improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which cannot be controlled e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide A e Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used see Print media specifications on page 252 e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine e Using inflammable print media can cause a fire e Use designated print media see Print media specifications on page 252 A The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the p
275. lly resumes If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step Troubleshooting_ 214 Paper jam in optional high capacity feeder i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the optional high capacity feeder right bottom door Close the optional high capacity feeder right bottom door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 3 Pull out high capacity feeder tray 5 Insert the high capacity feeder tray back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes Troubleshooting 215 Paper jam in the multi purpose tray Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 1 i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam oH Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Ifthe paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine AN The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 2 Open and close the front door to resume printing Troubleshooting_ 216 3 Close the right door Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 3 n m m 7 o i E Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 2 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam Z Click this link to open an animation about
276. m Out Zooms the image out Ei Zoom In Zooms the image in Scale Allows you to scale the image size you can L enter the size manually or set the rate to scale proportionally vertically or horizontally Rotate Allows you to rotate the image you can select Lr the number of degrees from the drop down list 1 Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or Ly T horizontally Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image or to invert the image Properties 5 Shows the properties of the image For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the on screen help Scanning 109 faxing optional This guide gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes e Preparing to fax e Using a fax in your computer e Understanding the fax screen e Sending a fax e Receiving a fax e Adjusting the document settings Z e You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone line For more information ask the internet service provider e We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet q
277. machine 6 Click Login iY If you do not use SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out 7 Click Box 8 Select the box which has the document you want to move Then click Browse Files 9 Select the document you want to move Then click Move To Box The Move To Box window appears 10 Select the box where the moved document will be stored 11 Click Select to begin Moving The machine deletes the stored data after moving Downloading a document to your computer You can download a stored document to your networked computer 1 2 10 11 Document box 181 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows Z If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password Select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login IZ If you do not use SyncThru Web Service for five minutes you will automatically be logged out Click Box Select the box that has the document you want to download Then click Browse Files Select the document you want to download Then click DownLoad To PC The DownLoad To PC window appears IZ You cannot use this feature depending on the job type of the selected docu
278. mat which the forwading fax will be saved as using the left right arrows The type of File Format you can select is different depending on Address Type e Forward amp Print This option allows to print the forwarded fax after forwarding If you want to use this option press the Forward amp Print button 4 Press OK from the display screen Setting the junk fax This machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as spam or junk fax numbers You can enter up to 10 junk fax numbers 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Junk Fax Setup from the display screen 2 Press On to activate this feature Junk Fax Number st Off VY OK X Cancel 3 Press Junk Fax Number List The Junk Fax Number List window appears 4 Press Add The Add window appears Faxing optional 123 5 Enter the junk fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel and press OK Z e If you set On in Caller ID you can select a junk fax number directly from the Caller ID List window Press Caller ID The Caller ID List window appears e The Caller ID shows the information of the callers who have called your machine e The Caller ID may not support depending on your country or telephone service provider For detailed information contact your telephone service provider Printing a fax report You can set the machine to print a report wh
279. ment If DownLoad To PC is inactivated when you select a document make sure that job type Click Download Select the appropriate option when the pop up window appears You can open directly or save the document management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine This chapter includes e Easy Capture Manager e Samsung AnyWeb Print e Easy Eco Driver e Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Easy Capture Manager iY Available for Windows OS users only Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited Samsung AnyWeb Print Available for Windows and Mac OS X users only This tool helps you screen capture preview scrap and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung AnyWeb Print gt Download the latest version to link to the website where the tool is available for download Easy Eco Driver Available for Windows OS users only With the Easy Eco Driver you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing To use this application Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties should be checked Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts changing fon
280. n TI Scale 80 Fax Information W ref Ct Dialing Prefix 4 lofi 5 755 M Use Cover page Subject Message x p t O CD D E 3 Select Samsung CLX 9252 9352 Series fax from the drop down list in Printer 4 Choose the number of copies and pages 5 Choose your paper size orientation and scale 6 Enter the recipients fax number into To s input area You can also use Addresses pressing LE button if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Printer Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Serie 19 fa a roer aryr Presets Standard B Copies 1 4 Collated o Hg ae Pages All _ r OFrom 1 to 1 2 Paper Size Other NG 20 99 by 29 70 cm Re an Orientation NG T Scale 80 a Fax Information UU rofl O Dialing Prefix es a lofi gt M Use Cover page Subject Message Leo Co 7 If necessary enter the access code in Dialing Prefix input area 8 If necessary you can send the fax with cover page check Use Cover Page Enter the subject and message of the fax job YH You can set more detailed options for cover page option in Samsung Fax Cover Page Select Samsung Fax Cover Page from the drop down list under Orientation 9 Click Fax ao 10 The Fax Journal icon appears on your Macintosh dock Click the Icon You can see the status of the fax job You can also delete hold resume and pause the fax job
281. n 85 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 85 Entering email addresses 86 Resending the latest email address 86 Printing an email confirmation report 87 Scanning originals and sending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server 87 Understanding the Scan to Server screen 89 Scanning and sending to SMB WEBDAV FTP server 89 Entering server addresses 91 Resending the latest server address 91 An example of security configuration for anonymous user on SMB server 93 Scanning originals and sending to a USB memory device scan to USB 93 Understanding the Scan to USB screen 94 Scanning to a USB memory device 95 Attaching stored documents 95 Sending a stored document 95 Previewing image to be scanned 95 Using the Preview button 96 Changing the scan feature settings 96 Scanning from both sides of originals 96 Changing the resolution 96 Selecting the size of originals 97 Selecting the orientation of originals 97 Delaying a scanned image transmission 98 Book scanning 98 Build job 98 Setting job completion notification 99 Selecting the type of originals 99 Selecting the color mode 100 Changing Darkness 100 Changing Sharpness 100 Changing Contrast 100 Adjusting background 101 Erasing backside Images 101 Scan to Edge 101 Quality 101 Scan Preset 102 File Format 102 File Name 102 File Policy 103 Folder Creation 103 Using a programs setting 103 Saving Programs 103 Using Programs 103 M
282. n a single page see Image Repeat on page 66 Back Returns to the Basic tab Copies 0001 Advanced Image Shift Off Booklet Off Book Copy Off Covers Off Transparency Off Programs a 2 4 w i Back bl Save Document ee Image Shift Allows you to adjust the image s position see Image shift copying on page 66 Booklet Allows you to create booklets see Booklet copying on page 68 Book Copy Allows you to copy the left or and right pages of book on separate output paper see Book copying on page 69 Covers Automatically adds covers taken from a different tray see Cover copying on page 70 Transparency Adds a blank or printed separator between transparencies within a set see Transparency copying on page 70 Back Returns to the Basic tab Watermark Allows you to print a watermark on printouts see Watermark on page 71 page 72 e Poster Copy Prints an image divided into 9 pages see Poster copying on page 73 e Duplex Scan Speed Speed up the copy scanning see Selecting duplex scan speed on page 73 e Job Completion Notification Sends an email notification after the copy job is completed see Setting job completion notification on page 74 e Back Returns to the Basic tab e Build Job Allows you to copy several pages or different types of originals after all originals are scanned see Build job on page 74 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab
283. n change the settings you have set e Delete Removes a selected fax forward setting Setting the fax forwarding 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Fax Forward Settings from the display screen Received Fax Printing Secure Receive Toll Save et Prefix Dial Maibox Setup Fax Forward Settings 2 3 re aa Caller 1D 2 Press New 3 Set the appropriate options e Forward Type Select a fax type using the left right arrows e Line 1 or Line 2 When both fax kit and fax multiline kit are installed on the machine select a fax line you want using the left right arrows The fax which is sent or received via selected line is forwarded to designated destinations e Address Type Select an address type which will be used for forwading the fax e Address Enter or select the receipient s address Fax and Email You can enter the address directly pressing the Address input area When the pop up keyboard appears enter the address and press OK You can also enter the address easily using Address Book SMB FTP WebDAV and Box You can enter the address using Direct input or Address Book Address Book is inactvated when you select Box e Document Name Enter the document pressing the Document Name input area When the pop up keyboard appears enter the document name and press OK Document Name is inactvated when you select Fax e File Format Select a file for
284. n page 54 4 Press the Image tab gt Erase Backside Image 5 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the backside image is 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying_ 77 Copying in a negative image Set this feature to copy the original with the light and dark colored areas or the colors of the image inversed Copies 0001 Adjust _ Background m o Negative Image Erase Backside Copy the original image with Image the light and dark colored areas of the image inversed Negative Image On Color Adjustments X Cancel 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press the Image tab gt Negative Image from the display screen Press On to activate this feature Press OK from the display screen Press Start on the control panel to begin copying ew Copying_ 78 Using a programs setting This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the last jobs Saving Programs 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 3 Set the
285. n see if the port is occupied by another application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly Troubleshooting 248 condition Suggested solutions The machine does not scan e Ensure a document is loaded into the machine ensure your machine is connected to the computer e If there is an I O error while scanning if Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 4 It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X10 3 2 Update your MAC OS to OS MAC OS X 10 3 3 or higher Some letters are not displayed normally during the cover page printing Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover page printing The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher
286. naging print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making ita much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication Glossary_ 260 ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsim
287. nclude in the group using the pop up keyboard Then press OK 4 If you are not sure of the name you can use the Search button Enter the first few letters or just press Search The machine shows the individual list Press the name you want and then press OK Go to step 7 5 Press Add then the name of individual is saved 6 Press the name of individual you want to delete Press Delete The name of the individual will be deleted from the group 7 Press OK to save the information Searching Address Book for an entry You can search the addresses that are currently stored in the address book 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book from the display screen You can find addresses in a specific category such as Index Individual Group Favorite Email Fax etc KM Index ABC DEF GH KL MNO p 20 Result s 5 Pages Name Type Favorite Administrator Prdividuel pik 1 5 Alex Individual Babara Individual Dave bpdividual 4 SelectAll New PE Close amain Y When you select Index you can find the addresses which classified with first letter of the all registered addresses by pressing the specific alphabet category For example if you press ABC you can see the addresses with the first letter of A B and C 2 Select the specific category you want using the left right arrows For example you want to find the Group address press the
288. nd commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscell
289. ne is in a state where an error bai might occur in the future For example it might be in toner low status which may lead to toner empty status l Error The machine has at least one error Samsung l rinter status Management tools_ 183 Toner Level o You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge The machine and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature 2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings G Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online User s Guide 4 You can view the online User s Guide IZ This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide 5 Close Close the window Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools iY e Availabe for Windows OS users only Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 o
290. nel You can see the number of impressions kata Device Na Large Page Print Copy na 05 Items 1 1 Pages Total Usage Print Copy Fax Print Repot Total a no Simplex i 57 45 0 144 346 Mono Duplex mo 16 0 b 405 Simplex 53328 403 0 la 53773 Color Duplex 925 B62 o 154 lagi Total Impressions 57799 1326 0 240 69365 Print Close When you select Device you can see the number of impressions by device Impression here means one side printing e Total Usage Displays the total number of impressions e Large Page Displays the total number of impressions with large size paper e Print Displays the number of impressions by printing e Copy Displays the number of impressions by copying e Fax Print Displays the number of impressions by received faxes e Report Displays the number of report impressions e Send Usage Displays the number of images sent via email server etc e Fax Send Usage PSTN Displays the number of sent faxes e Print Prints the usage counter report When you select User you can see the number of usage limit and remaining usage by each user For detailed information about Counter refer to the Administrator s Guide Introduction_ 29 Eco button The eco feature allows you to save print resources and leads you to eco friendly printing When you press the Eco button the machine turns the eco mode on or off If the eco mode is on you can see the eco image Z
291. ning many pages select Divided Into Sets you can divide the output booklet into multiple batches The maximum sheet in a batch is 15 sheets For example if you copy 80 pages of a document and set the number to 10 First batch 1 40 pages 10 sheets Second batch 41 80 pages 10 sheets 4 Click the Advanced button Then select the option you want e Folding Options You can use this option when a optioanl booklet finisher is installed K When you select Fold or Fold and Staple Booklet Tray is available only in Output Tray Options see Output Tray Options on page 145 However a batch of more than 15 sheets is not printed out to the booklet tray but to the finishing tray None Disables this feature Fold This option allows you to fold the center of booklet Fold and Staple This option allows you to staple and fold the center of booklet e Gutter This option allows you to shift the images to create a center margin for the booklet e Right Binding This option allows you to select page reading order right to left 5 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type iY The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Original size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without
292. nitor the finishing tray Printouts can become crooked and fall off of the finishing tray Off Disables this feature 1 Staple Select this setting to bind the printouts with a staple You can also select the staple positon with Left or Right in Staple Direction 2 Staple Select this setting to bind the printouts with two staples You can also select the staples positon in Staple Direction Depending on the options you select the result will vary Refer to the below table before using the 2 Staple option Origianl orientation Original orientation Direction of paper Available Staple DADF Scanner grass display screen feeding in the tray Direction Result In the DADF Upright Images Long Edge Feed LEF Left or Right Left Right d A toy 03 i Sideways Images LEF Top la i Upright Images Short Edge Feed SEF Top LA y Sideways Images SEF Left or Right Left Right 1 pdi e In the DADF Upright Images LEF Top LA Sideways Images LEF Left or Right Left Right it Upright Images SEF Left or Right Left Right sir NP d A Sideways Images SEF Top at Copying_ 58 e Punch Holes are punched in the printouts for filing purposes Depending on the options you select the result will vary Refer to the below tables before using the Punch option Or
293. nly when you use the PS printer driver PostScript PassThrough This option specifies whether to print PostScript data created by the application that can create the PostScript code for printing The default is checked Printing 146 If this option is checked some print options such as Multiple Pages Per Side Watermark Booklet Printing Poster Printing and Scaling Options may not work correctly when printing from the application that can create the PostScript code for printing In that case please uncheck this option if In some cases unchecking PostScript PassThrough may cause unexpected printout If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Eco tab Use the Eco tab to set various printing options The Eco tab allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing When you select Eco Printing you can see the eco image T4 on some options Also Some options are not available to use in the eco mode Click the Eco tab to display the options shown below 3 Printing Preferences paan Basic Paper Graphics Finishing Advanced Eco Samsung Paper gt Device A4 Omm Eco Options 210x297mm inch Type Printer Default Print Mode Normal Result Simulator Printer Status Eco Options e Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel
294. nting 4 In the Edit Overlay window click Create 5 In the Save As window type a name up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover 6 Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 8 The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive N i The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 Create or open the document you want to print 2 Tochange the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 3 Click the Advanced tab Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list 5 If the overlay file you want does not appear in theText drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When
295. nting information of stored data on page 177 003 004 9 005 comm test rele 3 File s 1 File 0 File Favorite Favorites e Combine Combines two or more stored data as one single data see Combining stored data on page 178 002 003 004 a e This button allows you to move to USB Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select a menu you want to move E You can choose the layout for viewing the stored data Detal Search from thumbnail or list ee q Select bel Save Document e Job type list Displays the job types You can select a job type if necessary A Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box a wer T 5 File s 1 2 Document Name Page Job Type Date test4 1 Box 2008 12 24 119 test2 1 Box 2009 11 19 Print List test Box 2009 12 24 test 1 Copy 2009 11 18 v e Stored data list Displays all stored data You can select a stored data in this area Al Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box E com tax ooj scan Box 5 File s y v v Document Name Page Job Type Date test4 x 2009 12 24 2009 11 19 Print List e Preview Displays the preview image This button can activate only when a stored data is selected see Previewing the stored data on Document box_ 170 Using document box features This machine allows you to print the stored data on HDD You can also send the st
296. nu includes settings related to error alerting e Printer Alert Provides settings related to when alerts will be received e Email Alert Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email e Alert History Provides a history of device and toner related alerts Job Accounting Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status iH e The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use e Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine see System requirements on page 137 e Available for Windows OS users only Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually Go to the Printing Preferences click the Basic tab gt Printer Status button These icons appear on the Windows task bar Icon Mean Description Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or warnings Warning The machi
297. of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one Condition Suggested Solutions Misformed e If characters are improperly formed and characters producing hollow images the paper stock may AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc be too slick Try different paper see Print media specifications on page 252 e If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If toner smears on the page Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 252 Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the imaging unit Cleaning the inside If you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service represen
298. of WebDav User Domain does not appear If the SMB server you entered is not registered with any domain leave it blank or enter the computer name of the Scanning 90 SMB server e Ifthe FTP server you entered is not registered with any domain leave it blank 10 Press the File Folder input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the file folder name of the server for storing the scanned image Then ress OK 11 Press the Document Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the document name will be stored Press OK iH You can select the stored file format in Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Scan to Server Settings gt File Format 12 Select the File Policy option you want using the left right arrows If the server has the same named file already the file will get processed by following the file policy you selected e Change Name The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Cancel Does not send the scanned file if the file with same name is already there on the server e Overwrite The sent file overwrite the existing file 13 Select the Folder Creation option you want using the left right arrows e Use Login Name If you select On in this option the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named using the user name which is you entered in step 7 iY If the file folder has a sub folder with the same name
299. of copies 1 IE i l l2 NG i The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window iY To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print setting see Opening printing preferences on page 140 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window Y e The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript based applications such as Acrobat Reader Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop etc e If you are using Windows Internet Explorer the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen captured images or printing the image Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung AnyWeb Print gt Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers e For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes e For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound Printers e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printer
300. olutions The machine is not receiving Plug in the power cord and turn on the power switch see Turning the machine on on power page 26 or the connection 7N Click this link to open an animation about cable between the g p solving power problems computer and the i E machine is not connected Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it see Connecting a printer cable on page 27 properly l4 Click this link to open an animation about solving connection problems Display screen problem Condition Suggested solutions The display screen e Adjusts the brightness of the display screen does not show e Tum the machine off and back on again If the anything problem persists call for service Troubleshooting_ 240 Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Printing problems Paper jams during printing Clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 210 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Paper sticks together Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray see Print media specifications on page 252 Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper see Print media specifications on page 252 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load pap
301. om the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Using overlay This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver What is an overlay An overlay is text and or images stored on the computer hard drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay 2 To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 3 Click the Advanced tab and select Edit from the Text drop down list Edit Overlay window appears Edit Overlay Overlay List Overlay Creation Status No Overlay Selected Confirm Page Overlay When Pri
302. omatically or if you wish to specify a certain document size 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Original Size from the display screen Advanced Original Size Auto ASP BAL Duplex ci Original i i AAT ASO B5 JIS TP Orientation Delay Send AaB ASB BSUS By Priority Send 2 v inch Size vV OK X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option K You can change the paper list on the display screen pressing inch Size or mm Size The paper list is divided into the available A B size type and letter size type paper in this machine e Auto Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports only when originals are Letter Ledger Legal Statement A3 A4 A5 B4 or JIS B5 sized e Other preset values Allows you to easily select values commonly used 3 Press OK from the display screen Faxing on both sides of originals This function is especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper 1 Press the Advanced tab gt Duplex then set the original orientation Advanced Original Size Duplex Crane 2Sided Book rientation Delay Send 2Sided Calendar Priority Send 12 v Vel X Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Calendar For originals
303. on which you want to print the machine automatically prints from the trays in the priority order set 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt Tray Priority Setting Auto Continue E Paper Tray 2 MP Tray Substitution ay Pi Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Word B 2 Press a tray and give priority in the order for printing job using UP and Down 3 Press OK Setting the tray confirmation message When you load paper into a tray you can set the confirmation message to appear automatically This machine can detect some paper sizes and types automatically If you want to set the paper size and type or the machine cannot detect them you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window 1 Press Machine Setup gt Tray Settings gt Settings gt select the tray you want from the display screen Tray 1 Tray 4 Auto Continue Tray 2 MP Tray Peper Substitution A N Tray Pronty Tray 3 Auto Tray Switch Setting i Back 2 Press Tray Confirmation Message Paper Size tamad Paper Type On a ras Tray Confirmation Message RV oe X Cancel 3 Press On 4 Press OK Media and tray_ 49 copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents This chapter includes e Understanding the copy screen e Basic copy e Changing the settings for each copy e Using special copy features Understanding the copy
304. on using the multi purpose tray 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before Open the multi purpose tray and pull out the extention if necessary Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print media Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems see Print media specifications on page 252 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray 4 loading originals Media and tray_ 42 Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much otherwise the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew 5 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray can automatically detect various sized paper see Media sizes automatically detected on page 44 For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel see Tray setting on page 47 The
305. ondition Suggested Solutions The punch hole positions are askew in the standard finisher The bridge covers are not inserted well Insert the bridge covers correctly see If this paper jam persists make sure the bridge covers are inserted correctly When the bridge covers are not inserted correctly it could cause paper jams and hole punch positions askew on page 227 Toner specks e The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media specifications on page 252 e The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative e Check the location of the machine If the area is not well ventilated this problem may occur The punch hole positions are askew in the booklet finisher The bridge covers are not inserted well Insert the bridge covers correctly see If this paper jam persists make sure the bridge covers are inserted correctly When the bridge covers are not inserted correctly it could cause paper jams and hole punch positions askew on page 229 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there might be a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on
306. ontainer f Introduction 18 Inner view SCX 8230 8240 Series 3 Imaging unit 1 Waste toner container 4 Locking lever i If you want to see the imaging unit you need to remove the waste toner container Lift the locking lever upward Then remove the waste toner container 2 Toner cartridge Introduction 19 View with Standard finisher optional 6 7 8 5 AIS Standard finisher front door 6 Top door T Manual stapler Standard finisher Front door handle Finishing tray 5 Staple Top tray o 2 3 Manual stapler button Bridge unit 4 5 Introduction 20 View with Booklet finisher 1 optional e 9 5 2 8 0 gt Booklet tray Top tray Finishing tray Top door Booklet finisher front door Booklet finisher front door handle Manual stapler 0J010 0 Bridge unit alele ee Manual stapler button Introduction_ 21 View with Booklet finisher 2 optional Hole e 1 Knife wheel 5 Staple 2 Booklet maker handle 6 Booklet Staple 2 EA 3 Fold wheel Booklet maker 4 Booklet jam removal wheel Z If you want to open the booklet maker hold the booklet maker handle and pull it out Introduction_ 22 View with Cabinet stand and High
307. ontrol panel if necessary 6 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Completion Notification Press On to activate this feature 8 Press Email Address input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter the email address which you want to recieve the job completion notification Press OK You can also i e You can select the email address pressing Address Book e You can enter an email address only 9 Press OK from the display screen 10 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Copying_ 74 Build job This feature allows you to copy various originals at once consisting of multiple batches and or different sizes The copy job will start after scanning all originals 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 5 Press the Advanced tab gt Build Job from the display screen Copies 0001 Advanced nage Job Completion Noticetiog Build Job ee Poco pel B8 anned ka KA 4 4 vV K X Cancel 6 Press On The machine starts to scanning After the scanning the machine shows the window asking
308. ook using SyncThru Web Service on page 132 e Recent Shows the latest 10 server addresses sent You can also choose server addresses instead of pressing the pop up keyboard see Resending the latest server address on page 91 e Attach Loads documents currently stored in Document Box see Attaching stored documents on page 95 e Duplex Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided Book or both sides of paper 2 Sided Calendar see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value see Changing the resolution on page 96 e Preview Allows you to see a preview image before scanning see Previewing image to be scanned on page 95 e Programs Allows you to save the current settings for future use see Using a programs setting on page 103 e Save Document Saves document on HDD in your machine see Saving documents on page 104 This button allows you to look closely into some options or you can see options as a whole by pressing Eg Scanning_ 87 Advanced tab o This button allows you to move to USB Copy Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to D Advanced Original Size Auto Original J Upri 3 S hole 4S Upright mages Delay Send Off Book Scan Off Preview Build Job Off rograms 12 v K Back H Save Document
309. operating systems such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems e Your machine is equipped with a network interface Copy originals in several formats e Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the original documents on a single page see N up copying on page 63 e There are special functions to erase catalog and newspaper background images see Adjusting background on page 77 e The print quality and image size can be adjusted and enhanced at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Scan in color and use precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using Networks scanning see Scanning on page 82 Set a specific time to transmit a fax optional e You can specify a certain time to transmit a fax and also send the fax to several stored addresses e After transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting Use USB flash memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it various ways for your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored in the device see Printing from a USB memory device on page 165 Features of your new product_ 13 Features by models The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Some features and
310. option e Best Produces a high quality image but the file size will be larger e Normal Produces a normal quality imag 3 Press OK from the display screen When you set Color Mode to Mono in the Image tab the Quality option is grayed out Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scanning job 1 Press the Output tab Scan Preset Quality m Custom OCR bi Scan Preset File Format Sharing and Printing Archival Record ama lad High Quality Printing Simple Scan 2 Press the appropriate option e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Produces a high quality output with the largest file size e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Archival Record Produces an electronic file which is one of the smallest file size of the output e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with texts only The file size of output is small 3 Press OK from the display screen Scanning 101 File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job 1 Press the Output tab gt File Format from the display screen Quality JPEG XPS Scan Preset File Format m PDF TIFF 1 1 Y OK XK Cancel 2 Press the appropriate
311. opy See Saving documents on page 80 e Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to USB See Saving documents on page 104 e Fax See Saving documents on page 127 You can also store the scanned data directly in Document Box 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Document Box gt Save Document from the display screen mm 003 004 9 005 Kk comm test rele nia 1 Fil 1 Fil 0 File Favorite Favorite2 Favorite releas month refere OFie 0 File O File O File Detail Seach 4 Select Document 3 Set the appropriate option using the left right arrows Original Size Auto File Name Untitled 20100511 1433 Color Mode 4 Color b boxes z Duplex Type Box No Box Name c m m 1 Sided gt Common nasoro 3 common_image 1 2 4 100 dpi gt J Original Orientation F Sala 4 Upright images gt 2 demo_image v v X Cancel e Original Size Selects the actual paper size of the originals e Color Mode Selects the color options of scanned data e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans one side of the original or both sides of the original e Resolution Selects scanning resolution value e Original Orientation Selects the orientation of the originals 4 Press File Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Ente
312. or higher www samsung com printer About this user s guide_ 12 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of your printed documents Special Features N ANN NAGA NUN Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print with a resolution of up to 9 600 x 600 dpi effective output 600 x 600 x4 dpi e CLX 9352 Series prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 35 ppm CLX 9252 Series prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 25 ppm e CLX 9352 Series prints A3 sized paper at up to 17 ppm CLX 9252 Series prints A3 sized paper at up to 12 ppm e SCX 8240 Series prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 40 ppm SCX 8230 Series prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 30 ppm e SCX 8240 Series prints A3 sized paper at up to 20 ppm SCX 8230 Series prints A3 sized paper at up to 15 ppm Handle many different types of printable material e The multi purpose tray supports various printable materials see Print media specifications on page 252 e The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper e The 1 040 sheet standard tray and 1 040 sheet optional dual cassette feeder support plain paper in various sizes e The 2 000 sheet optional high capacity feeder supports various paper types in A4 and letter see Print media specifications on page 252
313. or margins You cannot use this feature while using Book Copy see Book copying on page 69 Copies 0001 Original Type Sharpness Border Erase Erase Edge Contrast Hole Punch Erase Mirror XX Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Image tab gt Erase Edge from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Border Erase Erases an equal amount of edges from all copies e Hole Punch Erase Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies 6 Press OK from the display screen 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Changing the sharpness Set this parameter to emphasize the edges to make text more readable This parameter can also be used to adjust the original image 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing t
314. or printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print it see Secured Job on page 31 Printing 158 Printer 10 88 181 197 iH fa Presets Standard 3 Copies i Collated C Two Sided Pages All z J OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size a 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Tr la Job Serting a Print Mode Confidential A C TU lofi TREL ee User ID tech writer A z 0 9 Job Name Untitled A z 0 9 Enter Password NG Digit Confirm Password E NG Digit O Pore Guns tow Cara Grim User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log in Mac OS X Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel Enter Password Enter the password you want to use This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it Store This mode is used only for storing documents on the HDD If necessary you can load and print the stored documents You can find the stored file in the Document Box see Document box on page 167 Printer 10 88 161197 AA Presets Standard HA Copies 1 Collated C Two Sided Pages All O From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 a 20 99 by 29 70 om Orientation Uo Te Job Setting HU Print Mode Store H petat lol GEED p User ID te
315. ored data to specific destinations using Fax Email Server Box or USB or combine two or more stored data as one single file Selecting the job type When you select and enter a box you can see the job type list above the stored data list The default value of job type list is All If you select a job type in the job type list selected job types get sorted out in the stored data list 1 Press Document Box gt Select a box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 004 9 005 x test Kk rele E l 1 File 0 File Favorite2 Favorite3 Detail Search 4 Select bal Save Document eee EEE 2 Press a job type you want to sort Previewing the stored data You can preview the stored data using Preview This feature has many handy functions for preview 1 Press Document Box gt Select a box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 2 Select a stored data from the stored data list and press Preview 3 Press the appropriate option for preview if necessary A monthly_report gt demo2 gt Preview Tools Function Reduces the previewed image by 2 times or 4 times You can view the reduced image Magnifies the previewed image by 2 times or 4 enlarged image times You can view the desired portion of the E Fits the previewed image on the preview screen If the selected stored data contains mutiple pages
316. original document loaded with the top toward the back of the machine Copying_ 61 Using the DADF Using the scanner glass e Sideways Images Select this setting for an original document loaded into the DADF with the top of the original document toward the left side of the machine or an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the original document toward the right side of the machine Using the DADF Using the scanner glass Icon lt 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying ID card copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card Copies 0001 Advanced Original Size lt Step 1 gt lt Step 2 gt Paper Source Y Place Front Side Place Back Side Original and Press Start and Press Start Orientation i x E T N Up Image Repeat 1 14 v i Back _ i e This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e The size of the 2 sided originals should be smaller than A5 if not some of it won t be copied Press Copy from the display screen Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy from the display screen Select a tray in Paper Source Follow the steps on the display screen Place the f
317. ors Only Prints a confirmation report only when an email transmission is not successful e Always Always prints a confirmation report whether an email transmission is successfully completed or not e Never Never prints a confirmation report 3 Press OK Scanning_ 86 Scanning originals and sending via SMB WEBDAV FTP scan to server You can scan an image and send it to a total of three destinations via the SMB WEBDAV or FTP if To scan and send an image to a server you need to set up network parameters using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For details about how to set up the network parameters refer to the Administrator s Guide on the User s Guide CD Understanding the Scan to Server screen Press Scan to Server in the display screen Basic tab 1 Address Is Book 2 3 Recent 4 Add Preview Attach a SA Programs Duplex Resolution A heli be Save Document e Add You can add a new SMB WEBDAV or FTP server directly iY You can also add a new SMB WEBDAV or FTP sever in SyncThru Web Service see Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service on page 132 e Address Book Inputs the recipient s address just by pressing stored addresses You can store frequently used server addresses using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service see Setting up an address book using the control panel on page 128 or Setting up an address b
318. ously as shown below The following image is an example of entering Shared Network access Shares that can be accessed anonym x Local Policy Setting 5 Click Apply and then OK 6 Select the shared folder and click on the right mouse button Scanning_ 91 7 Click Sharing and Security 10 Add ANONYMOUS LOGON on Group or user names as shown 8 Click Security and add ANONYMOUS LOGON on Group or user below names as shown below Permissions for Shared Share Permissions Group or user names fsf ANONYMOUS LOGON 8 Everyone Shared Properties General Sharing Security Customize Group or user names efi Administrators WORKPLACE Administrators fst ANONYMOUS LOGON Qi CREATOR OWNER fi SYSTEM EP Users WORKPLACEWUsers lt Allow Deny Permissions for ANONYMOUS LOGON Add Bemove Permissions for ANONYMOUS LOGON Allow Deny Full Control Modify Read amp Execute List Folder Contents Full Control Change Read ease For special permissions or for advanced settings UK 11 Click Apply and then OK on Permissions for Shared 12 Click Apply and then OK on Shared Properties 9 Click Sharing gt Share this folder gt Permissions Shared Properties General Sharing Security Customize ew You can share this folder with other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this
319. ox name Then press OK 4 Press the appropriate option in Box Property e Public All users can use the box e Secured Set up the password to prevent unauthorized person from accessing 5 Press an appropriate option in Auto Document Delete After deleting files the files cannot be restored e 1 Day 30 Days Set up the period for which stored data are in the box After the period the stored data get automatically deleted e Never It is set not to delete the stored data 6 Press the Favorite Box option if necessary If you press a favorite box already assigned the warning message appears If you want to change the favorite box to the box you are editing press Yes 7 Press OK from the display screen Document box 168 Delete Box You can delete a created box The Common box cannot be deleted even by administrator 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Box Setting gt Delete Box from the display screen Came een mmm een m meme manne naam as Edit Box Auto Document Delete pelts Box a a 2 Select the box number you want to delete using the up down arrows You can select the box directly using the Browse button 3 Press OK from the display screen 4 Press Yes when the confirmation window appears Saving documents This machine allows you to store the scanned data on HDD using the Save Document feature in Copy Scan to Email Scan to Server Scan to USB or Fax mode e C
320. paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Close the right door 3 Close the right door Troubleshooting_ 219 Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex 1 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path Jam Duplex 2 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam AN The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the g Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam machine A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 1 Open the right door AAAS o NG N N ss S5 Sy 3 Close the right door 3 Close the right door Troubleshooting_ 220 Paper jam bottom of duplex path Jam Duplex Regi Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the 1 Gently pull the paper out of the output tray machine 1 Open the right door 2 Open and close the front door Printing automatically resumes If the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed remove
321. phics When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts printing performance speed may be enhanced in this setting This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver e Native TrueType If your machine is a TrueType rasterizer machine select this option to download the TrueType font as an outline font This option is available only when you use the PS printer driver e Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because downloading fonts takes time selecting this option can speed up your printing time When using Use Printer Fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen iY If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Graphic Controller Fine Edge This option allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Advanced Raster Compression This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from computer to a printer If
322. plies to scanning two sided original documents You can select whether the machine scans only one side or both sides of the paper Press the left right arrows to toggle the values Address ft Book l Recent Add Edit Ce 0 Bcc 0 Preview Scan from a Samsuna MFP WEB Document sent to you using a San Attach V Programs Duplex Resolution 4 1 Sided b 4 300 dpi gt Save Document KE PA BM a gl sayo Docnene e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Calendar For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees l4 If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish select No for this option Changing the resolution You can adjust document resolution Press the left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clearer the result but the scanning time may take longer ES fe ee DH Scan from a Samsung MFP Recent EZ Document sent to you using a San Add Edit Cc 0 Bec 0 Preview CG v Attach ee Programs Duplex bel Save Document The following table shows detailed information for this feature resolution and file format options Feature Resolution dpi File Format Scan to Email 100
323. r Please open close door There is a problem in the actuator fan Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service Actuator Fan Signal Failure error number Please open close door There is a problem in the actuator fan Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service Actuator Motor Failure error number Please open close door There is a problem in the actuator motor Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service Actuator Sensor Failure error number Please open close door There is a problem in the actuator sensor Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service ADF System Failure error number Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the dual automatic document feeder Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Booklet maker Error error number Please open close door There is a problem in the booklet maker Open and close the booklet finisher front door If the problem persists call for service color Imaging Unit Failure error number Install color imaging unit again There is a problem in the imaging unit Reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists call for service color Imaging Unit Failure error number Please open close door There is a pro
324. r a host name Press OK 6 Press the Port No input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 Press OK 7 Press the User Name input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the user name of the server Then press OK if e Incase of SMB or FTP if you want the server to permit access for unauthorized person press the Anonymous box This box is unchecked by default If you checked the Anonymous box go to step 9 e If you want to use the Anonymous box the SMB server which you select needs to security configuration before you send the data see An example of security configuration for anonymous user on SMB server on page 91 e Depending on operating sytems installed in SMB server such as Windows 7 Home Premium you cannot use the Anonymous option For detailed information refer to the user s guide of operating system e Incase of WEBDAV you can send the files in encryption pressing SSL If the machine and receiving WebDAV server of the SSL Secure Sockets Layer option are different the transfer could be failed Also if the receiving WebDAV server can receive only the encrypted file you need to press the SSL button 8 Press the User Password input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the user password of the server Press OK 9 Press the User Domain input area Then the pop up keyboard appears Enter the user domain of the server Then press OK iY e Incase
325. r driver s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list Using help Click the question mark from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the driver If the question mark does not appear select the option you want to know about and press F1 on your keyboard If you want to search information via a keyword click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option To get information about supplies driver update or registration and so on click appropriate buttons Printing 148 Setting Device Options When you install the optional devices such as optional dual cassette feeder standard finisher etc this machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices in Device Options Job Accounting allows you to print with the given permission 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers e For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes e For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control P
326. r fax number on any fax you send 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Machine ID amp Fax No from the display screen Machine ID amp Fax No Fax Initial Settings Ring to Answer mama 1 3 Default Value t Redial Error Correction Mode Receive Start Code Junk Fax Setup 2 Press a fax line if your machine has multiple fax lines 3 Press the ID Name input area The pop up keyboard appears Enter your name or the company name see Understanding the pop up keyboard on page 32 Press OK 4 Press the Fax Number input area Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel 5 Press OK to save the information Sending a fax 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 K This machine automatically reduces the original document to fit the paper size of the receipient s fax For example the origianl document size is A3 sized paper and the paper loaded on receipient s fax is A4 sized paper the original paper get reduced to be fit to A4 sized paper 2 Press Fax from the display screen 3 Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 4 Press the Basic tab 5 Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 6 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the
327. r higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator e Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software Click the Help button from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator To open the program Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Document Creator gt Samsung Easy Document Creator The Samsung Easy Document Creator interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are USING Easy Document Creator sansung EASY Document Creator o Click the information button to see the program s version information Information l Help Click the help button to get the information of any option you want to use a Quick Scan Automatically scans with the settings provided in Configuration You can pre set the options such as image type document size resolution or file type see Quick Scanning on page 185 Scan Provides more in depth options for scanning documents on a one by one basis see Scanning on page 185 l4 Text Converting will only be available after installing the optical character recognition OCR software proivided in a separate installation file e Image Scannin
328. r machine e Advanced Select one of the options This option is available only Printing 149 when you use the PS printer driver Advanced Device Options Protocol PostScript Output Protocol ASCII Available PostScript Memory 56686 C Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray C Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray C Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts Timeout Job Timeout Wait Timeout Font Size Minimum Font Size pixeks Maximum Font Size pixeks Send CTRL D C Send CTRL D Before Each Job Send CTRL D After Each Job Output Protocol Specifies the protocol of the printer will use for print jobs When you click ASCII data is sent in ASCII format 7 bit which may take longer to print but can be sent through any I O channel such as a serial parallel or network port When you click Binary Binary Communications Protocol or TBCP Tagged Binary Communications Protocol all data except special control characters is sent in binary 83 bit format The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format Available PostScript Memory Specifies the amount of available PostScript memory It is a subset of the printer s total physical memory It is usually the best to use the default setting which is determined by your printer manufacturer Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray Specifies whether to convert the true gray RGB v
329. r the file name you want Press OK 5 Select a destination box where you want to store the scanned data 6 Press OK to scan and store the scanned data iY e To cancel the current scan job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 Document box_ 169 e fan original is placed on the scanner glass the machine page 171 shows the window asking if you want to place another page e Add Stores a new scanned data see Adding scanned data on Load another original and press Yes When you finish press page 172 No on this window e Detail Displays detailed information of the selected out of stored data see Viewing detail information on page 173 Understanding details of the document box Edit Changes the name and file property of the selected stored data screen see Editing stored data on page 173 e Delete Deletes the selected out of stored data see Deleting stored Press Document Box gt Select a box you want to enter gt Select from the data on page 173 display screen e Send to Sends the selected out of stored data to specific destination see Sending stored data on page 174 e Print Prints the selected out of stored data see Printing stored data on page 177 e Print List Prints the list of stored data on the document box selected see Pri
330. references on page 140 Frequent copy paper jams occur e Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner e Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner e The DADF may be left open while copies are being made e The machine may be turned on and off frequently Troubleshooting 245 Scanning problems Conditon Suggested solutions Scan and Fax Manager 2 Problem The scanner does not work Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the machine cable is connected properly Make sure that the machine cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Office or the
331. requently used fax numbers KN ful Address BOOK ae Recent Pause kaaa It On Hook C Programs Fax Line Resolution 4 Line p 4 Standard p r Save Document Press Programs gt List Press a program name on the list that you want to use Press OK Press Yes when the confirmation window appears The machine is now set to fax according to the selected setting Press Start on the control panel The machine starts scanning and sending a fax to destinations When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop on the control panel before the machine start transmission or press the Job Status button on the control panel and select the job you want to delete press Delete e If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window e While the machine is sending a fax you cannot send an email at the same time Faxing optional 125 Managing Programs 1 Press Fax from the display screen 2 Press Programs gt List 3 Press the appropriate option Program Name Select All Detail Edit Delete VY OK X Cancel e Select All Selects all programs e Detail Displays detailed information of selected program e Edit Changes a name of selected program e Delete Removes the selected programs 4 Press Cancle for return to the Basic tab Using previous settings
332. require repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements 1 Squeeze the lock lever on the handle and pull out the tray Y Align the paper and gently push it to the right side of the tray Otherwise it could cause paper jams 2 Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers Media and tray_ 40 4 Load the paper in the left side of the tray with the print side facing up The left side of the tray can hold up to 1 000 sheets of plain paper iH Do not overload the tray Otherwise it may cause paper jams Make sure that the paper is below the maximum paper Capacity guide inside the tray Media and tray_ 41 If the paper in the right side has run out the guide automatically pushes the paper in the left side to right side automatically KN NN ING TAR IN IN NINN INS SY NG TA 5 Insert the tray back into the high capacity feeder When you print a document set the paper type and size for the tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel see Tray setting on page 47 Multi purpose tray 3 The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on colored paper Tips
333. ress e From Enter the sender s email address e Title Enter the subject of email You can enter up to 50 characters to the maximum e Msg Enter the message of email You can enter up to 200 characters to the maximum e Address Book Inputs the recipient s address by pressing stored addresses You can save frequently used email addresses using the control panel or SyncThru Web Service see Setting up an address book using the control panel on page 128 or Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service on page 132 e Recent Shows the latest 10 email addresses used Also you can choose email addresses instead of pressing the pop up keyboard see Resending the latest email address on page 86 e Add Edit When entering the To From etc select the one you want to enter Then press this button You can also edit the value you entered using this button e Cc Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient e Bcc The same as Cc but the recipient s name is not displayed e Attach Loads documents currently stored in Document Box see Attaching stored documents on page 95 e Duplex Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided Book or both sides of paper 2 Sided Calendar see Scanning from both sides of Originals on page 96 e Resolution Selects scanning resolution value see Changing the resolution on page 96 e Preview Allows you to see a
334. ress Book e Delete Allows you to delete an email address in the Recent results Press the email address you want to delete Then press Delete 7 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 8 Press the Start button to scan and send the file If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking if you want to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window Printing an email confirmation report You can set the machine to print a report whether an email transmission is successfully completed or not i If a report contains characters or fonts that the machine do not support Unknown could be printed instead of the characters fonts in the report 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Scan to Email Settings gt General from the display screen Scan to Email Off From Address printer samsung com pa m i On Subject Scan from a Samsung MFP Auto Send To Self m Off Message Document sent to you usin On VY OK Cancel 2 Scroll down and press the appropriate option in Print Confirmation Sheets a Allow Edit From re fi Editable Print Confirmation m On Errors Only Sheets Not Editable Always 2 2 Email address of Logn User Never vV OK X lt Cancel M a e On Err
335. resses in Groups Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows i If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login iY If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Click Groups 9 Click Add Group The Add window appears Add Group Group Name Add individual s after this group ts created E 10 Enter the group name to be added in Group Name 11 Check Add individual s after this group is created K If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you made skip this step You can add individual addresses next time pressing Group Details 12 Click Apply Then the Add window appears Groups Address Book Group2group as User Name Total O MAX 500 13 Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book 14 Click the arrow in the middle The selected addresses are added in Group Address Book 15 Click Apply Editing Group addresses in Groups Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on
336. reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 252 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door dual cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder right bottom door is securely closed If the bottom doors are not completely closed open and close the bottom doors Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Troubleshooting 244 Condition Suggested Solutions Solid Color or Black pages e The imaging unit may not be installed properly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Condition Suggested Solutions An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your machine is p
337. ribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge see Redistributing toner on page 188 e Open and close the front door Or check whether the seal tape of the toner cartridge is removed or not see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 189 e Ifthe problem persists call for service color imaging unit requires charger s cleaning Clean the unit The charger of imaging unit need to clean after the specified number of paper is printed out Clean the charger of imaging unit see Cleaning paper dust stick and chargers of imaging units on page 191 color black toner cartridge is not compatible Check user s guide The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine see Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine on page 189 color black toner cartridge is not installed Install it The toner cartridge is not installed or the cartridge is not properly installed Install the toner cartridge If it is already installed try to reinstall the toner cartridge If the problem persists call for service color LSU Unit Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the LSU Laser Scanning Unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service color black toner cartridge Failure error number Install color
338. ributing toner e Clearing original document jams e Replacing the toner cartridge e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Cleaning paper dust stick and chargers of imaging units e Clearing paper jams e Replacing the imaging unit e Understanding display messages e Replacing the waste toner container e Solving other problems l4 If you cannot solve problems using this chapter contact your 2 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine administrator or service center You can see the contact information from Machine Setup gt Customer Support gt Contact Info or Service Center This information is configured by the machine s administrator Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs e Toner low related message appears on the display e The status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner Click this link to open an animation about redistributing toner 1 Open the front door 3 Thoroughly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge l4 If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into f
339. rint User ID and Job Name are used when you need to find a stored document using the control panel Printer 10 88 181 197 MG Presets Standard i Copies 1 fA Collated C Two Sided Pages All e s Ofrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 NG 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Tr NG Job Setting a Print Mode Print Schedule H namana Print At 30 10 2009 19 40 aa a lofl arm gt gt User ID tech writer A z 0 9 Job Name Untitled A z 0 9 SAMSUNG C C A tow Cara Cam Print At Select the date and time you want to print User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log in Mac OS X Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel Printing 159 Printer Features Printer 10 88 181 197 ia a Presets Standard B Copies 1 M Collated Two Sided Pages M All CE a O From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 A 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation L F j 1 gt Printer Features 4 Feature Sets Advanced Options HH l l Reverse Duplex Printing ja 101 Goa RGB Color Standard 4 Fine Edge Normal 3 Skip Blank Pages Screen Enhanced 18 FF Ci A tow Caneel Chi e Reverse Duplex Printing This option allows you to reverse the print order when duplex printing e RGB Color This setting determines how colors
340. rint amp Fax 2 Select your machine and click Options amp Supplies 3 Select Driver and set the necessary options General Driver Supply Levels Print Using Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Series PS sj To take full advantage of your printer s options confirm that they are accurately shown here For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the printer s documentation Optional Tray finisher Not installed 1a Printer Memory Optional Hole Punch M Job Accounting Password Encryption Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following iH e The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version e The following panes may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer properties pane Select other advanced features from the drop down list Printer 10 88 181 197 ie fa Presets Standard H Copies i Fl Collated C Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad 20 99 by 29 70 em Orientation LG TextEdit H mg
341. rinter may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used see Print media specifications on page 252 Loading paper in the tray Standard tray optional dual cassette feeder Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into the standard tray The standard tray can hold a maximum of 1 040 sheets of plain paper You can purchase an optional dual cassette feeder and attach it below the standard tray to load an additional 1 040 sheets of plain paper Refer to the Supplies and Accessories guide in the supplied CD i e Standard tray contains two trays Tray 1 Tray 2 e Optional dual cassette feeder contains two trays Tray 3 Tray 4 e The process to load paper in tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 and tray 4 is the same e If you have installed the optional high capacity feeder refer to the installation guide provided with it A Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems that require repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements 1 Squeeze the lock lever on the handle and pull out the tray 1 Paper length guide Media and tray_ 37 6 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length 7 After loading paper into the tray pinch the paper width guide and move it toward the stack of paper
342. rinting Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 189 Troubleshooting 235 Message Meaning Suggested solutions End of life Replace with new transfer belt unit The life of the transfer belt unit expires totally Replace the transfer belt unit with a Samsung genuine transfer belt unit Message Meaning Suggested solutions Engine System Failure error number Please open close door There is a problem in the engine system Open and close the front door If the problem persists call for service Fusing unit is not compatible Check user s guide The fuser unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine fuser unit designed for your machine Fuser unit is not installed correctly Install it The fuser unit is not properly installed Reinstall the fuser unit If the problem persists call for service Engine System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HCF Failure error number Please open close HCF There is a problem in the high capacity feeder Open and close the high capacity feeder If the problem persists call for service Fax modem card is not installed Install the card The optional f
343. rious settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file Printing 163 using a usb memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes e Understanding the USB screen e About USB memory device Understanding the USB screen To use the USB feature press USB on the display screen l4 If you want to use this feature you need to insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine C3 USB 4 File s 6 Folder s 1 3 Pages USB Format Date Spotlight V100 Folder 2010 02 21 1 3 USB Capacity fy Temporaryttems Folder 2010 02 21 1 1 J C3 Trashes Folder 2010 02 21 SProxy0106 exe EXE 2010 03 24 7 pcen io SS 4 New Folder Close Oe B3 Moves back to the upper level e Select Moves to the selected folder e New Folder Makes a new folder in the USB memory device e Detail Displays information of the selected folder or file e Rename Changes the name of the selected folder or file e Delete Deletes the selected folder or file e E LS You can choose the layout for viewing the folder structure in folder view or list view e USB Format Formats the USB memory device e USB Capacity Displays the USB memory status e USB Print You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF JPEG PDF and PRN files see Printing from a
344. rmation on setting up your machine and requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Quick Reference H o D This guide provides operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions allowing the machine to immediately be used Online User s Guide Q This guide provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories Machine Driver Help This help guide provides you with help information on the printer driver and instructions for setting up the printing options see the User s Guide Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com printer Downloadable softwares You can download useful softwares from the Samsung website SyncThru M Web Admin Service convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously This software is for network models only http solution samsungprinter com e Samsung AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily http solution samsungprinter com personal anywebprint e XPS printer driver used to print XPS file format The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS
345. robably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the correct altitude setting to your machine Copying problems Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 252 e Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative e If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Condition Suggested solution Copies are too light or too dark Use Light and Dark arrows to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies in the Basic tab of the Copy menu Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around e The paper may not meet paper specifications see Print media specifications on page 252 Smears lines marks or spots appear on copies e If the defects are on the original press left right arrow to lighten the background of your copies in the Basic tab of the Copy menu see Changing the
346. rograms gt Samsung Printers 5 Direct Printing Utility 5 Direct Printing Utility The Direct Printing Utility window appears me Direct Printing 2 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section 4 Customize the machine settings for your needs 5 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added 2 Select the machine you wish to use 3 Customize the machine settings for your needs 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Changing the default print settings iY Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers e For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes e For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devic
347. rom a USB memory device Managing usb memory Deleting an image file Formatting a USB memory device Viewing the USB memory capacity Understanding the document box screen Box setting New Box Edit Box Delete Box Saving documents Understanding details of the document box screen Using document box features Selecting the job type Previewing the stored data Adding scanned data Viewing detail information Editing stored data Deleting stored data Sending stored data Printing stored data Printing information of stored data Combining stored data Using the box with SyncThru Web Service Box Setting Easy Capture Manager Samsung AnyWeb Print Easy Eco Driver Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager Advanced settings user interface overview Using Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status overview Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator Using features Plug ins 8 contents 186 186 186 187 187 TROUBLESHOOTING 188 189 191 195 199 201 201 202 203 204 228 228 229 231 233 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Opening the Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Scanners configuration Ports configuration Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Cleaning paper dust stick and chargers of imaging units Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Clearing original document jams Ori
348. ront side of an original facing down on the scanner glass as shown below and close the DADF When you place a original on the scanner glass leave a little space between the edge of the scanner glass and the original Otherwise the part of original could not be printed oe AA a Y 6 Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts scanning Copying_ 62 7 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass as shown below the Reduce Enlarge feature and then close the DADF When you place a original on the scanner glass leave a little space between the edge of the scanner glass and the original Basi Advanced Otherwise the part of original could not be printed Copit Original Size m off 6Up Original sj Orientation b 4 ID Copy 2Up 8Up GI CA MA NUD 4Up SUp A A Image Repeat 1 4 wv Y OK X Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Press Advanced tab gt N Up from the display screen 4 Press an option according to how many images to copy onto one page e Off Copies an original onto one sheet of paper e 2Up 32Up Copies corresponding numbers of separate originals to one page iY Depending on original document size output paper size and the reduced rate of image some options may be inactivated 5 S
349. rough the original paper When you use this feature Adjust Background in the Image tab are inactivated 1 Press the Image tab gt Erase Backside Image from the display screen tyvanced Adjust Background Erase Backside Image Scan to Edge Erase XX Cancel 2 Press the appropriate option e Off Sets this option off e Erase Lightens the background Use the left right arrow s to toggle the values 3 Press OK from the display screen Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan the full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the scan job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and send it right away via the network as a file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals 1 Press the Image tab gt Scan to Edge from the display screen Pa a 4 T N eag N A 4 ere Adjust Background Erase Backside Image Scan to Edge On ar a 2 2 vV OK X Cancel kamma a nee 2 Press On 3 Press OK from the display screen Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document The higher quality you select the larger file size you get 1 Press the Output tab gt Quality from the display screen Quality Best Scan Preset File Format pe Normal Draft 1 1 MANOK X Cancel ki A 2 Press the appropriate
350. rrent and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 e While the machine is sending an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Saving documents You can save the scanned originals to Document Box the machine s HDD in your machine The documents saved in Document Box can be printed if necessary K e For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter see Document box on page 167 e If important data is stored in the Document Box we recommend you to backup the data regulary Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine e Scan to USB is not supported the Save Document feature 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 2 Press Scan to Email or Scan to Server from the display screen 3 Set scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs see Changing the scan feature settings on page 96 4 Press the Basic tab Then you need to enter the each item using the pop up keyboard 5 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution see Scanning from both sides of originals on page 96 and Changing the resolution on page 96 6 Press Save Document ifs Cee ao Scan from a Samsung
351. rt when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine EX pa ND O gt Sending a fax manually using an extension telephone This method is sending a fax using an extension telephone Make sure that the extension telephone is connected to the EXT socket of the fax kit on the machine While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket copy and scan features are not available 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Fax from the display screen Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 Press the Basic tab Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 Pick up the receiver of the extension telephone When you hear the dial tone dial a fax number using the extension telephone 8 Press Start on the control panel when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the extension telephone KY KO ND Mga Resending Automatically When the line you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts follow the steps below 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Redial from the display screen 2 Press a fax line if
352. rver administrator should store the addresses 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows if If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 6 Click Login iW If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 7 Click AddressBook 8 Select Import The Import window appears Individual Address Bock Selected 0 Total NG MAG 500 Judd All F Favgaite Speed Kot Name Email Fax Lil FIP Welthae al l friend Friend Liebe com Mize ai friend friend abe com OSNA i ail J damia Compare aon Heat FI Li 4 tampary inpaya MAA F 5 carpi pakar bk GT AG F 6 ahay uor ii iuni co HATEHA E 7 hl 166 211 121 55 E 8 ltp kaman Pa al 9 observer 168 209 101 111 FI 10 testbed 168 207 114 32 al Li il share lip Da FI image 10 88 54 112 FI 13 personal 10 88 11 175 FI 14 Farvonte fawonka CI ground E PENE Fi al it wht mamayabang oom iNi Faia LIST DY 9 Select URL or Desktop and enter the address or folder name where the file is stored 10 Click OK Exporting Individual Address Book You
353. s 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 and Vista double click your machine For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing iY If See what s printing item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 4 From the Document menu select Cancel You can also access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon 3 in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel Printing 139 Opening printing preferences Print Mode This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing using the HDD in your machine The default Print Mode is Normal which is Preferences for printing without storing the printing file on the HDD You can also use this 1 Open the document you want to print option in other tabs 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list 4 Click Properties or Preferences gt Printing Preferences Pa Basic Paper Graphics Finishing Advanced Eco Samsung Paper gt Deve A4 Omm Orientation 210x297mm inch Portrait O Landscape C Rotate 180 Degrees Print Mode Normal Printer Status 4 You can check the machine s current status using the Printer Status b
354. s 1 p m T e 5 l3 2 Click Print 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c Temp file name K If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Documents and Settings or Users The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using Printing_ 156 Macintosh printing This section explains how to print using a Macintosh You need to set the print environment before printing see Installation guide Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make sure that your machine is selected Click OK Settings Page Attributes HH Format for 10 88 181 197 cs Samsung CLX 9250 9350 Series PS Paper Size A4 4 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Te r OD 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print Activating optional devices or accessories After installing the optional devices or accessories you need to activate the options 1 Open System Preferences and click P
355. s e XY Zoom This button allows you to set the reduce or enlarge each X width and Y Height between 25 400 Enter the value in the X or Y input area using the numeric keypad e Custom Zoom You can set and save the custom zoom size using Zoom or XY Zoom You can select the custom zoom size whenever you need it Copying multiple sides The duplex feature allows you to copy one sided or two sided originals on both sides of the paper or divide two sided originals into multiple one sided copies Check the available paper using the Duplex feature You can only use this feature with Letter SEF Letter LEF Ledger Legal Executive SEF Statement SEF A3 A4 SEF A4 LEF Ab SEF B4 JIS B5 SEF ISO B5 SEF Tabloid Extra 8K 16K and Oficio KW 63to 163 g m 16 43 Ib bond only e When you use this option ID Copy Book Copy Transparency and Poster Copy in the Advanced tab are inactivated Press the Basic tab 5 Duplex then press the appropriate duplex option Copies 0001 paana Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Auto Original 10096 BEY 4 1 pa 1 2S5ided 1 1Sided Sok more Programs Light as Dark b E over i J bal Seve Document i If an original is placed on the scanner glass and you press 1 gt 2 Sided 2 gt 1 Sided or 2 gt 2 Sided the message Another Page appears after the first page is copied Load another original and press Yes When you finish press No on this window e 1 51 Sided
356. s is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals QB Ready To Cos pn A Copies 0001 1 Press Copy from the display screen Bs 2E Auto Original 100 1 1Sided Auto Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex Color Mode 4 AA A3 AG gt Auto Tray 1 J Tray 2 Tray 3 les par 6 Press Start from the control panel to begin copying 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 a a C iH e Tocancel the current copy job press Stop on the control panel OO a aj J N Ton kalas aon ERD at 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 Copying_ 52 Copying different sized originals This feature allows you to copy the different sized originals at once iY a You can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the 1 control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 If you want to copy different sized originals at once select Mixed Size under the Original Size option see Selecting the size of originals on page
357. s shown in the preview Blank page detection This operation automatically detects whether the scanned image is blank or not Delete page Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the scanning process Separate files Blank page will work as a scan job separator That is when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will divide scanned image sequence into parts Each part will be treated as a separate document group Advanced In the Advanced mode additional options such as Image Adjustment Image Enhancement and Additional Settings are available Image Adjustment Allows you to perform some transformations of the scanned image These transformations include automatic adjustment of image size straightening and rotation Image Enhancement Allows you to remove various defects of the image and improve its quality Additional settings Allows special processing of scanned images These transformations include stitching several partial image scans into a single image processing of scanned books and watermark stamping Scanning with TWAIN enabled software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software i 2 mag Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face do
358. s the auto detected paper depending on the size b SEF meaning is Short Edge Feed c LEF meaning is Long Edge Feed e Detected o Not detected N A You cannot load the paper in the tray Media and tray_ 44 Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray When using special media we recommend you feed a piece of paper at a time Check the maximum input number of media for each tray see Print media specifications on page 252 Extra Heavy Weight 1 176 to 216 g m 47 to 57 Ib thick paper Extra Heavy Weight 2 217 to 253 g m 58 to 67 Ib thick paper Thin 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib thin paper Bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond Color 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib color backgrounded paper Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib label Transparency 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib transparency paper Envelope 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib envelope Preprinted 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib preprinted paper Cotton 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib cotton paper Recycled 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib recycled paper Standard tray Optional optional high Multi purpose Types dual capacity tray cassette feeder feeder Thick O O O Reavy O O O weight Extra Heavy O O O weight 1 Extra Heavy X X O weight 2 Thin O O O Cotton O O O Color O O O Preprinted O O O Recycled O O O Bond O O O Archive O X O Letterh
359. s you to view and change the printer properties Management tools_ 186 Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes 2 jp class T Stale idle Printers in class Shows all of the machine classes class Refresh Renews the classes list Add Class Allows you to add a new machine class 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the ex Remove Class Removes the selected machine class Scanners configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung machine devices change device properties and scan images Unified Driver Confquratar Switches to Scanners configuration Shows all of the installed scanners Shows the vendor model name and type of your scanner gSa e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document Ports configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason bee on ansa isalin eii ad e ea a L dami down dowmip10 dewmip11 Port ka umugpd Switches to Ports configuration Shows all of the available ports o
360. sage will disappear automatically Follow the cleaning procedure below K Click this link to open an animation about cleaning the charger of imaging units 1 Open the front door 2 Hold the left right locking levers and push outward at the same time Then remove the waste toner container CLX 9252 9352 Series Troubleshooting_ 191 4 Pull the paper dust stick out m2 5 Remove the paper dust Lift the locking lever upward Then remove the waste toner container SCX 8230 8240 Series 77 3 Hold and push down the lever and open the inner cover Troubleshooting 192 8 Pull the corresponding charger cleaner completely as shown below Do not strongly pull the charger cleaner to prevent it from separating from the machine It can cause damage to the machine A 9 Push the corresponding charger cleaner completely as shown below Repeat step 8 and 9 five times 6 Insert the paper dust stick back 7 Close the inner cover Troubleshooting_ 193 10 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place 11 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed If the message still appears do the steps 8 and 9 again Troubleshooting
361. save the scanned originals to Document Box HDD in your machine The documents saved in Document Box can be printed if necessary K e For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter see Document box on page 167 e If important data is stored in the Document Box we recommend you to backup the data regulary Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Set the copy features in the Advanced or Image tabs if necessary see Using special copy features on page 61 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad if necessary 6 Press Save Document Copies 0001 a5 Paper Supply Reduce Entarge Duplex Color Mode Auto Originall 10096 1 1Sided Auto Auto Tray 1 kj Tray 2 les Tray 3 le more Programs Light Dark CT output STL 7 Press Copy amp Store or Store only e Off Disables this option e Copy amp Store Prints and stores scanned originals e Store only Stores scanned originals only 8 Press the File Name inpu
362. send an email at the same time Email When you send stored data to email you can only send data which the JOB_TYPE is Box Fax or Scan 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 9 005 K rc KU _ 1 File 0 File Favorite2 Favorite3 003 004 a mm test 3 File s 1 File 005 006 007 008 el morthi weekl refere O File 1 File O File O File Detail Search 4 Select bal Save Document a C 2 Press the stored data you want to send Press Send to 3 Press Email and then press OK K e Copy The stored data is kept in the box e Move The machine deletes the stored data after sending Baro Common Selected File 1 Ale J 4 Enter the each item using the pop up keyboard see Entering email addresses by the address book on page 85 or Entering email addresses by the pop up keyboard on page 86 l4 If you already configured the From Subject and Message input area in Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Scan to Email Settings gt General you can see the sender s email address subject and message 5 Select the file format of the stored data by pressing the left right arrows from Format 6 Press the Start button to send the stored data Document box_ 174 While the machine is sending an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax Server When you send stored data to server you can only s
363. settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel To print from an application a Open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type size and source d Press OK e Start printing from an application Media and tray_ 43 Media sizes automatically detected This machine can automatically detect various sized paper Refer to the table below size BISING INN eee Multi purpose tray Se ne capas Duplex printing Letter SEP O N A Available Letter LEF e o Available Ledger o a N A Available Legal e O N A Available Executive SEF O O N A Available Executive LEF N A O N A Available Statement SEF N A Available Statement LEF N A N A N A N A A3 o N A Available A4 SEF o N A Available A4 LEF o o Available A5 SEF 9 O N A Available A5 LEF N A o N A N A B4 o o N A Available JIS B5 SEF o a N A Available JIS B5 LEF N A o N A Available A6 SEF N A o N A N A A6 LEF N A N A N A N A ISO B5 SEF O 0 N A Available ISO B5 LEF N A O N A N A Folio o O N A Available Oficio O O N A Available Tabloid Extra O N A Available SRA3 N A O N A N A 8K O O N A Available 16K O O N A Available a This machine could detect the similar sized paper a
364. sing Release Held User Request The job is temporarily stopped when Job Hold was pressed You can release the job pressing Release Held Delayed Print The job is temporarily stopped until the time you set for the delay print job which is sent from a computer Held Needs Resources The job is temporarily stopped when the machine has problem such as paper empty paper mismatch etc Interrupted The job is temporarily stopped when the Interrupt button was pressed for an urgent copy job Paused The job is paused when the Stop button was pressed or the machine fault Completed The job is completed Completed with error The job is completed with error Deleted If you select a job in the list and press Delete the job is deleted Help button Press the Help button when you have no idea how to use some function The display screen shows the functional description in User s guide or Admin Guide These guides provide information to provide a basic understanding as well as detailed explanations on each step during actual usage Valuable for both novice and professional users all users can refer to these guides for using the machine Manual Info Manual default User s Guide ess SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING Save Document Saves d 1 7 THROUGH EMAIL SCAN TO EMAIL Saving documents on pa i This buton akows r ANO Taga lo teveral Gasinatora you ca cman 4 wore s an ermal RITE you need to set ip EONIA parame
365. sist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as ma
366. ss 35 loading documents 35 scanner glass loading documents 35 scanning 2 sided originals 96 adjusting contrast 100 95 basic information 82 98 changing settings 96 erasing backside images 101 file format 102 103 to email 83 87 job completion notification 98 Linux 107 Macintosh 107 preview 95 103 resolution 96 saving documents 104 101 97 96 99 TWAIN 107 searching address book 130 sending delaying a scanned image transmission 97 server address entering server addresses by the address book 89 service contact numbers 255 setting up an address book from a control panel 128 SMB FTP WebDAV individual address 128 specifications general 250 print media 252 stapler using manual stapler 33 start button 24 stop button 24 T to USB memory device 93 94 toner cartridge redistributing toner 188 189 touch screen problem solving 240 tray loading paper in multi purpose tray 42 setting the paper size and type 47 TWAIN scan 107 U understanding the fax screen 112 understanding the scan screen 82 UNIX printing 162 system requirements 138 usb understanding the usb screen 164 USB memory how to manage 166 USB memory device how to scan 93 printing 165 W waste toner container replacing waste toner container 199 watermark create 153 delete 153 edit 153 print 153 Index_ 265 Windows common Windows problems 247 printing 137 scanning 82 137 X XPS printer driver
367. ss Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers 7 Press the Advanced tab gt Priority Send Advanced Original Size Duplex Original O Orientation n Delay Send Priority Send 1 2 v TA 4 X Cancel 8 Press On to activate this feature 9 Press OK from the display screen 10 Press Start on the control panel to start the urgent fax job Receiving a fax This part explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to the Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the receive mode to another mode follow the steps below 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Fax Initial Settings from the display screen 2 Press a fax line if your machine has multiple fax lines Receive Mode Dial Type a Back 3 Press Receive Mode 4 Press the appropriate option e Telephone Receives a fax by pressing On Hook and then Start e Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Is for when an answering machine is attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine
368. ss Print All secured faxes will be printed out 4 Ifyou want incoming faxes to go into memory always press Whole Day Otherwise go to next step 5 Press Start Time and set the specific start time using the up down or left right arrows Press OK Hour 01 12 Minutes 00 59 ksal lugal Maal luto lado 6 Press End Time and set the specific end time using the up down or left right arrows Then press OK 7 Press OK from the display screen l4 To deactivate the Secure Receive feature press Off In this case the received fax will be printed out Faxing optional _ 117 Selecting a received fax output tray This option allows you to specify the tray where the fax will be printed 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Received Fax Printing gt Output Tray from the display screen Duplex Auto Reduction Paper Source e v a Output Tray Mark Ist Page Color Printing a a ee Staple Receive Header ed K7 Back 2 Press the appropriate tray l4 e The Finishing Tray and Top Tray are available only when the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed e When the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed Center Tray is inactivated 3 Press OK Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper Set this duplex feature to save paper When the machine prints the received fax data it prints them on both sides of the paper 1 Press Ma
369. stopper and then close the DADF If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DADF open 4 e This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e When you use this option Original Orientation N Up Image Repeat and Booklet in the Advanced tab are inactivated Copies 0001 Advanced mage Image Shift Ca pr Of Both Pages Book Copy j From Left Copy entire book dividin VOl j K Omang Booklet left and right page Both Pages Book Copy Left Page From Right Covers Right Page Transparency A 24 w VY OK X Cancel ee BB 1 Press Copy from the display screen 2 Place a page of book face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 i e When you place a book on the scanner glass leave a little space about 10 mm between top or bottom edge of the scanner grass and the book If you want to get the printouts well follow the recommendation e Some books may not be available in this feature such as a hard cover book poor bound etc 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Copy from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Prints only the left page of the book L e
370. suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas con
371. t e Delete Removes a selected job from the list e Delete All Removes printing jobs or all jobs from the list When you press Print Job Only all printing jobs are deleted which Job Type is Host Print e Promote Promotes a selected job from the list when the many jobs are queued The selected job cannot be promoted in front of the progressing job K You cannot use the Promote button depending on the state of the job If the Promote button is inactivated when you select a job the job you selected is considerably progressed e Job Hold Holds a selected job from the list K You cannot use the Job Hold button depending on the state of the job If the Job Hold button is inactivated when you select a job the job you selected is considerably progressed e Release Releases the held job from the list e Close Closes the job status window Completed Job Displays the list of completed jobs Copies 0001 Completed Job 50 Result s 1 10 Pages 1 10 2 Host Print Completed Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation in Aheywood 3 Host Print Completed Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation in Aheywood 4 Host Pant KC ompleted Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation in Aheywood 5 Host Print Completed Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation in Aheywood v Detail Close a a e No Gives the order of jobs e Job Type Displays type of the job such as print copy fax etc e Status Displays the status of each completed job see
372. t a image you want e Levels You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Adjustment Levels option e Matching You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Balance option Screen option allows you to select options to convert a continous tone image into printable binary image Printing 143 print with the effect of gloss finish Font Text Check All Text Black to print in solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Advanced Advanced Font Text Options True Type Options Download as Outline O Download as Bit Image gt Print as Graphics Use Printer Fonts Reset Jea e Automatic Automatically selects an option for best format This option is available only when you use the PS printer driver e Download as Outline This option allows the driver to download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored resident on your machine If after printing a document you find that the fonts did not print correctly choose Download as Bit image and resubmit your print job e Download as Bit Image This option allows the driver to download the font data as bitmap images Documents with complicated fonts such as Korean or Chinese or various other fonts will print faster in this setting Download as bit image is useful when printing from Adobe programs e Print as Graphics This option allows the driver to download any fonts as gra
373. t area The pop up keyboard appears 9 Enter the file name you want Press OK 10 Select a destination box and press OK 11 Press Start from the control panel to begin copying and storing or storing only fH To cancel the current copy job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete current and pending jobs using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete see Job Status button on page 30 Copying_ 80 Using the Quick Copy menu The Quick Copy menu allows you to quickly set copy options without having to move to a lower level menu or another tab But this menu does not provide all copy options If you need to use other copy options use the copy options in the Copy menu see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 or Using special copy features on page 61 1 Press Quick Copy from the display screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Copying_ 81 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce Enlarge Duplex N Up Output Paper Supply etc 4 You can set the default Quick Copy options from Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Copy Settings from the display screen Set the most frequently used settings 4 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad on the control panel if necessary 5 Press Start from the
374. t area Then enter the server port number using the pop up keyboard Press OK 5 Press the User Name input area Then enter the user name using the pop up keyboard Press OK l4 e Incase of SMB or FTP if you want the server to permit access for unauthorized person Press the Anonymous box This box is unchecked by default If you checked the Anonymous box go to step 7 e Incase of WEBDAV you can send the files in encryption pressing SSL If the machine and receiving WebDAV server of the SSL Secure Sockets Layer option are different the transfer could be failed Also if the receiving WebDAV server can receive only the encrypted file you need to press the SSL button 6 Press the User Password input area Then enter the password using the pop up keyboard Press OK 7 Press the User Domain input area Then enter the domain name using the pop up keyboard Press OK Setting up an address book_ 128 K e Incase of WebDav User Domain does not appear If the SMB server you entered is not registered any domain leave it blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server 8 Press the Path input area Then enter the name of file folder where the sent files are to be stored using the pop up keyboard Then press OK Example FileFolder 9 Select the File Policy option you want using the left right arrows If the server has the same named file already the file will get processed by following the file policy you selected e Ch
375. t full in the machine There is a problem in the machine Check the error message on the display screen and resolve the problem Fuser Unit Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HDD is almost full 6 Check user s guide HDD is almost full in the machine There is a problem in the machine Check the error message on the display screen and resolve the problem Troubleshooting 236 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions HDD System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the hard disk Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Output tray face up is full Remove printed media The output tray face Up is full Remove papers from the output tray face up the machine resumes printing ICON device is not installed Install the device The image converter device is not installed Install the image converter device If it is already installed try to reinstall the image converter device If the problem persists call for service Paper is empty in tray number Load paper There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Paper is empty in tray MP Load paper There is no paper in t
376. t remove the USB memory device while it is in use The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by a user s misuse e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see USB memory device s User s Guide Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF JPEG and PRN files You can select 50 files and print selected the files at once USB print option supported file types e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory device see Printing to a file PRN on page 156 e TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline e PDF PDF 1 7 and below i In case of 8bit CMYK JPEG files Job could be cancelled To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it see About USB memory device on page 164 iY e The machine cannot detect the unformatted USB memory device Format and then reinsert the USB memory device into t
377. tScript driver 139 print media feature 252 138 XPS printer driver 138 file format scanning 102 file name scanning 102 file policy scanning 102 folder creation scanning 103 front view 1 15 front view 2 16 G glossary 258 group email address for scanning 85 group address 129 H hard disk 14 help use 148 ID copy 62 imaging unit replacing imaging unit 195 inner view 18 19 J jam clearing paper 210 tips for avoiding paper jams 210 JPEG USB scanning memory device 90 102 129 132 K keyboard understanding the keyboard 32 L LED interrupt button 32 machine status 25 power saver 32 understanding the status LED 25 Linux common Linux problems 248 printer properties 161 scanning 107 137 unifled driver configurator 186 loading in the document feeder 36 originals on the scanner glass 35 paper in multi purpose tray 42 37 40 special media 45 Macintosh common Macintosh problems 249 printing 157 scanning 107 137 managing USB memory 166 mirror image copying 76 multi purpose tray loading 42 tips on using 42 using special media 45 N negative image copying 78 N up copy 63 N up printing Macintosh 160 Windows 151 O OCR 101 option view 20 21 22 23 optional tray loading paper 37 40 original document clearing jam 201 loading in the document feeder 36 on the scanner glass 35 original orientation copying 61 faxing 120 scanning 97 original size
378. tab is inactivated Faxing optional 122 Forwarding a fax to another destination You can set your machine to forward a sent or received fax to other destinations via fax email SMB FTP etc If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful Understanding the Fax Forward Settings options Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Fax Settings gt Fax Forward Settings from the display screen i The Fax Forward Settings option can only be configured by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine When the machine requests enter the ID and password 5 Result s 1 1 Page Forward Type Address Type Address fi Fax Transmit Fax 5678906543 2 Fax Transmit Email admin admin siso com 3 Fax Transmit SMB j 4 Fax Receive Box Common f 1 f 5 internet Fax Transmit WebDAV Settings Select All New K7 Back e Settings Enter the sender s emil address title of email and message of email Unless you change the settings fax is forwarded with the information via email e Select All Selects all fax forward settings for deleting all e New Creats a new fax forward setting see Setting the fax forwarding on page 123 e Detail Displays detailed information of a selected fax forward setting You can edit the setting pressing Edit You can also delete the setting pressing Delete e Edit Edits a selected fax forward setting You ca
379. tart button After that normal operation of the machine should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properly e Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SUSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the
380. tative Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 252 e Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack e Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door dual cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder right bottom door is securely closed If the bottom doors are not completely closed open and close the bottom doors e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl see Print media specifications on page 252 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the
381. ter and emad settings Using the contol panel oF SyncThru Web Service For details about how to nat up fhe network parameters and emai satinga refer lo te Agruristrator s Guide or Document Bas et Press sapped CD to mowe to Understanding the Scan to Email screen Advanced tab Press Scan to Email n the Gaptey screen Basic tab amet pu B Heip List Print a O 4 28 gt Close Help List R Allows you to select User s guide or Admin Guide Print e wax Prints the current view page or specific page range you set N I Reduces the guide size on the display screen pa Magnifies the guide size on the display screen f O Fits the guide size on the display screen 1277 Ll Moves to previous or next page e Close Closes the Help window Interrupt button When you press Interrupt the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops the current printing job for an urgent copy job When the urgent copy job completed the previous printing job continues When you select the staple feature for a printing job interrupt mode works after a stapling completed in the printing job Status Description Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode Green On The machine is in interrupt printing mode Power Saver button When the machine is not in use save electricity by pressing Power Saver Pressing this button for one second puts the machine into power save mode
382. the SyncThru Web Service shows IZ If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service Click Login The Login window appears Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in to the machine Click Login IZ If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out Click AddressBook IZ You can change arrangement by clicking each column header For example clicking Speed No you can see the addresses in the order of speed dial number If you click Speed No again you can see in the reversed order Enter the name for which you want to search in search input area i You can find addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number E mail SMB etc For example if you want to find the fax number click drop down list next to Q and select Fax Number Click Q Then the search result appears Z You can see the addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number E mail SMB etc For example if you want to see the addresses which are included fax number click drop down list below LDAP and select Fax Number Setting up an address book_ 133 Importing Individual Address Book You can import an address book file from a server or computer The file should have the file extension csv Also you can import addresses from a LDAP server Before importing the addresses to your machine the LDAP se
383. the blue LED is on the machine is powered on and you can use it If you turn the machine off press this button for more than three seconds Press Yes when the confirmation window appears A When you use the display screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else Introduction 24 Understanding the status LED The color of the status LED indicates the machine s current status Status Description Off e The machine is off line e The machine is in power saver mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically Green On The machine is on line and can be used Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes Copy The machine is copying documents Scan The machine is scanning documents Print e When the status LEDslowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the status LED blinks rapidly the machine is printing data Red On e The imaging unit is at the end of its lifespan Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one e The toner cartridge is totally empty Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one e A paper jam has occurred see Clearing paper jams on page 210 e The door is open Close the door e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray see Loading paper in the tray on page 37 e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message se
384. the home screen 3 Select a save location for the scanned images 4 Click Save to save the image Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings Scanning to a Social Networking Site Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click SNS Upload from the home screen 3 Click Scan to SNS gt Start 4 Click Scan Upload Existing File Click SNS Upload from the home screen Click Existing File to SNS gt Start Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next Follow the instructions in each social networking site ee eS a K If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due to a network environment issue it s needed to check security limitations established in your network with network administrator To guarantee correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication Converting to an E Book Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen 3 Click Scan to E Book gt Start 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name and select a save location 5 Click
385. the page e Asingle sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job e The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper see Print media specifications on page 252 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thick paper see Opening printing preferences on page 140 e lf these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print page 252 printer driver If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page the toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge e The color tone might not be adjusted Adjust the color tone e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media specifications on e Ifthe entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the e Acombination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service
386. thing such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Glossary_ 261 Printer Driver A program used to se
387. tination a Destination ad My Documents File Format JPEG v Scan Property Computer ID NO HEYWOOD01 Save Location C Users heywood Pictures Samsung o Resolution 300 dpi w Scan Color Color Scan Size ADF Duplex Scan Destination e Available Destination List Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC s registry Select the program you want to use and click on the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List e Front Panel Destination List Shows the list of applications to open scanned images e Add Application Allows you to add applications you want to use to Available Destination List e Remove Application Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the Available Destination List e File Format Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved You can choose from among BMP JPEG PDF Multi Page TIFF and Single Page TIFF Scanning_ 105 Scan Property e Computer ID Shows the ID of your computer automatically You can change the ID using the Setting button You can also set password checking Enable Password These ID and password are used in Scan to PC see Scanning originals and sending to your computer scan to PC on page 105 e Save Location Allows you to choose a location as the default saving folder e Resolution Allows you to choose the scan resolution e Scan Color Allows you to choose the scan
388. ting 144 Finishing tab Use the Finishing tab to set various finishing options Click the Finishing tab to display the options shown below 3 Printing Preferences Samsung Print Mode A4 Omm sort Opona 210x297mm inch 123123 I Staple Options Staple Hole Punch Options Output Tray Options Output Bin Printer Setting a Ce aa e Sort Options This option allows you to sort out the printouts easily None Disables this option Offset When printing multiple copies this option shift the output position of each set iY This feature is available only when the standard or booklet finisher is installed Rotate When printing multiple copies the printouts are stacked criss crossed in sets if e This feature is available only when the standard or booklet finisher is not installed e This feature is available only with Letter and A4 sized print media e Before using this feature you have to load the paper in the trays with SEF Short edge feed and LEF Long edge feed For example direction of paper feeding in the tray 1 is SEF and direction of paper feeding in the tray 2 is LEF e Staple Options This option allows you to specify the number of staples and the staple position This option is available only when the optional standard finisher or booklet finisher is installed Staple Select the number of staples between 1 Staple and 2 Staple
389. tings produce good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax Press left right arrow to toggle the values ei jt Address Book Recent Pause E Hg C It ta On Hook NA Programs Fax Line Resolution 2 4 Line 1 b lt 4 Standard p z Save Document e Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time e Fine Recommended for the originals containing small characters thin lines or text that was printed using a dot matrix machine e Super Fine Recommended for originals containing with fine detail This option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution e Ultra Fine Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail This option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Ultra Fine resolution When your machine is set to the Super Fine or Ultra Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support the Super Fine or Ultra Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine Faxing optional 120 Selecting the type of originals You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned 1 Press the Image tab gt Original Type from the d
390. to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the
391. to use only the numbers with the area code if necessary fH Inserting a pause with some telephone systems you must dial an access code 9 for example and listen for a second dial tone In such cases you must insert a pause in the telephone number You can insert a pause while entering fax number 4 Speed Dial No is automatically filled with the first free number Speed Dial No is the number representing a recipient s information you can use the numeric keypad on the control panel e Setting up an address book using SyncThru Web Service 5 Press the E mail input area Then enter the e mail address of the recipient using the pop up keyboard Then press OK 6 Press OK to save the information Storing Individual address SMB FTP WebDAV 1 Press Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Address Book gt New gt SMB FTP or WebDAV gt Individual from the display screen Name Untitled IP Address Host Name P Host Favorite Port No 445 ANONYMOUS User Name bd AOK X Cancel T 2 Press the Name input area Then enter the name of the recipient using the pop up keyboard Press OK Check Favorite for addresses you often use You can easily find them from the search results 3 Press IP or Host and press the IP Address Host Name input area Then enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name using the pop up keyboard Press OK 4 Press the Port No inpu
392. toner container is not installed Install it The waste toner container is not installed Install the waste toner container If it is already installed try to reinstall the waste toner container If the problem persists call for service Wireless network card is not installed Install the card The wireless network card is not installed Install the wireless network card If it is already installed try to reinstall the wireless network card If the problem persists call for service Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists contact a service representative Other problems include e See Power and cable connecting problems on page 240 e See Display screen problem on page 240 e See Paper feeding problems on page 241 e See Printing problems on page 241 e See Printing quality problems on page 243 e See Copying problems on page 245 e See Scanning problems on page 246 e See Scan and Fax Manager 2 Problem on page 246 ex See Fax problems optional on page 246 e See Common PostScript problems on page 247 e See Common Windows problems on page 247 e See Common Linux problems on page 248 e See Common Macintosh problems on page 249 Power and cable connecting problems Condition Suggested s
393. toner on page 188 Prepare new fuser unit The estimated life of the fuser unit is close Prepare a new fuser unit for a replacement Prepare new transfer belt cleaning unit The estimated life of the transfer belt cleaning unit is close Prepare a new transfer belt cleaning unit for a replacement Prepare new transfer belt unit The estimated life of the transfer belt is close Prepare a new transfer belt for a replacement Troubleshooting 238 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare new Transfer roller The estimated life of the transfer roller is close Prepare a new transfer roller for a replacement Message Meaning Suggested solutions Side feeder door is open Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place Punch hopper container is Full or not installed The punch hopper container is full or not installed Empty the punch hopper container Or install the punch hopper container Remove seal tape of color black imaging unit and reinstall The seal tape of the imaging unit is not removed Remove the seal tape of the imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 195 Staple cartridge is empty Replace it The staple cartridge has reached the end of its lifespan This message appears when the staple cartridge is completely empty Replace the staple
394. try to Illegal Operation store the fax again messages appear Blank areas appear You may have chosen the wrong paper settings Fail To Print A These messages May appear during printing at the bottom of in the user option setting For details about printer timeout error Just keep waiting until the machine finishes each page or on paper settings see Tray setting on page 47 occurred messages printing If the message appears In standby other pages with a appear mode or after printing has been completed small strip of text at check the connection and or whether an error the top has occurred i l4 Refer to Microsoft Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista User s Guide that Common PostScript problems came with your computer for further information on Windows error The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when messages several printer languages are used Problem Possible cause Solution PostScript file The PostScript e Install the PostScript cannot be printed driver may not be driver installed correctly e Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing e Ifthe problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check Error The print job was You might need to message appears too complex reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory A PostScript error The print job may Make sure that the print page prints not be PostScr
395. ts and more You can save frequently used settings as a preset How to use 1 Open a document to print 2 Print the document 3 Select the options you want to apply to the document You can see the preview of the applied features 4 Click Print Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager l4 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods e Available for Windows and Mac OS X users only e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung machine settings into one location Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments settings actions e Using Samsung Printer Status e Using Samsung Easy Document Creator e Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator and launching All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from the basic user interface and the advanced user interface Switching between the two interfaces is easy just click a button Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager To open the program For Windows Select Start 5 Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager For MAC Open the Applications folder 5 Samsung folder 5 Samsung Easy Printer Manager
396. ts make sure the bridge covers are inserted correctly When the bridge covers are not inserted correctly it could Cause paper jams and hole punch positions askew iH 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it out 3 Open and close the finisher front door Printing automatically resumes Troubleshooting 227 Paper jam at entrance of booklet maker 3 250 sheet booklet finisher only Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Lift up and hold the bridge cover Paper jam around puncher of finisher i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher top door 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Close the finisher top door Troubleshooting 228 sheet 250 3 Paper jam inside of booklet maker 3 booklet finisher only Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Pull out the booklet maker 3 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it out 4 Close the finisher
397. ty of printing features and send the documents to several destinations such as email server or fax Only users registered in the machine can use Box through login SyncThru Web Service Box Setting To use Box you need to create a new document box first in the User Box You can also edit or delete the created document boxes i e You can create up to 500 boxes The length of a document box name is limited to a maximum of 30 characters e A box can contain up to 200 stored documents e Common box is already created by default Si AN PpP P 2 Si u Wi u Ni 8 PF 55888 8 y Ww Y S9 S a 8 B2838080 8 efter ge Pal bo IND em XA MA E EE 3 e amp amp mr 5 5 e 8B e Add Box Creates a new document box Delete Box Deletes a created document box Edit Box Edits a created document box e Browse Files Enter the selected document box If you select Secured Box and set a password when you make a new document box enter the password when the Password window appears Add Box You can create a new box in which store your scanned data 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows IZ If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login The Login window appears
398. uality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter LINE EXT 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the optional fax kit Installation Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection varies from one country to another e Forwarding a fax to another destination e Setting the junk fax e Printing a fax report e Using a programs setting e Saving documents Using a fax in your computer You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network Sending a fax Windows To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program is installed when you install the printer driver 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window Click Print or OK 5 Enter the recipient s fax number and set the options if necessary gt iY For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help Fax Options Fax Machine Model IP Address or Name 10 88 181 197
399. ubject and Message input areas in Machine Setup gt Application Setting gt Scan to Email Settings gt General you can see the sender s email address subject and message Scanning 85 Entering email addresses Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book see Setting up an address book on page 128 you can enter email addresses singly or you can enter email addresses directly using the pop up keyboard Entering email addresses by the address book 1 Press Scan to Email from the display screen 2 Press To or From s input area 3 Press Address Book Basic KO printer samsung com Address Book UZE Scan from a Samsung MFP Document sent to you using a San Add Edit Cc 0 Bee 0 Preview aasa en ss Attach EE Programs Duplex Resolution 4 1 Sided b 4 300 dpi gt bel Save Document La Ca _ ee 4 Press Local or Server i If you want to use Server the LDAP Settings must be set before using Server For detailed information about the LDAP Settings refer to the Administrator s Guide on the User s Guide CD This function allows you to select addresses which are registered in LDAP Lightweight Diretory Access Protocol server through the network 5 Press the Search input area Then the pop up keyboard appears 6 Enter the first letter or full email address you are looking for Then press Ok 7 Press Search When search
400. ument p Previewing image to be scanned on page 95 Programs Allows you to save the current settings for future use see Using a programs setting on page 103 Save Document Saves document on HDD in your machine see Saving documents on page 104 or This button allows you to move to USB Copy Fax Document Box etc Press this button and select the menu you want to move to Scanning 93 Original Type Selects whether the original is text photo etc see Selecting the type of originals on page 99 Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scanned output see Selecting the color mode on page 99 Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scanned output see Changing Darkness on page 100 Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness level of the scanned output see Changing Sharpness on page 100 Contrast Adjusts the contrast level of the scanned output see Changing Contrast on page 100 Back Returns to the Basic tab Adjust Background Erases the background to some extent by adjusting density or brightness see Adjusting background on page 100 Erase Backside Image Prevents scanning the other side s image shown through the original paper see Erasing backside Images on page 101 Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge see Scan to Edge on page 101 Back Returns to the Basic tab Output tab Quality ea Scan Preset Custom File Format POF File Policy C
401. until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper 3 Squeeze the paper width guide and pull it to the end of the tray 1 Paper width guide 4 Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 5 Load paper with the print side facing up Media and tray_ 38 fH e Do not push the paper guide too far causing the media to wrap e If you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams O xX iH Do not overload the tray Otherwise it may cause paper jams Make sure that the paper is below the maximum paper capacity guide inside the tray 1 Paper capacity guide 8 Fix the the paper length guide using the locking switch Release the locking switch to load a different sized paper 1 Locking switch 9 Insert the tray back into the machine When you print a document set the paper type and size for the tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel See Tray setting on page 47 The standard tray and optional dual cassette feeder can automatically detect various sized paper See Media sizes automatically detected on page 44 If you set the Tray Confirmation Message ON in Tray Settings the confirmation window appears automatically
402. ur document to a selected paper size on page 152 e Using watermarks on page 152 e Using overlay on page 153 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Basic tab select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type drop down list 3 Select Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 4 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 5 Select the page order from the Page Order drop domn list if necessary 6 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document eula Gah nay A 3x3 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list 3 S
403. utton When you press the Printer Status button the Smart Panel program is opened The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 183 Printing 140 2 Printing Preferences Samsung Paper Devke A4 Omm 210x 297mm Qinch Normal Portrait O Landscape C Rotate 180 Degrees Printer Status Normal This mode prints without storing your document Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy first to check the quality then print the rest of copies in the list of Current Job after entering Job Status see Job Status button on page 30 You can find your printing job in the list and select it and press the Release button The rest of copies will be printed Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print it see Secured Job on page 31 Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name th
404. ver Box or USB Fax iH e When you send stored data to fax you can only send data which the JOB TYPE is Box Fax or Scan The sent data must be a black and white document when the JOB_TYPE is Box or Scan Otherwise you cannot use this feature 1 Press Document Box gt Select the box you want to enter gt Select from the display screen 003 004 9 005 comm test rele 3 File s 1 File 0 File Favoritel Favorite2 Favorite3 5 boxes a BE 002 003 004 Q demo_i MMO testi 3 File s 3 File s 1 File 005 006 007 008 nomhi weekl refere ORe 1 File Ofe Ofe Detail Search q Select bel Save Document as anman Aa AAP Al Copy Fax StoredJob Scan Box i access Ls Lc 6 File s 1 2 Document Name Page Job Type Date scan 1 1 Scan 2010 05 11 1 2 demo3 1 Box 2010 05 11 demo2 1 Box 2010 05 11 v Edit Delete 3 Press Fax and then press OK K e Copy The stored data is kept in the box e Move The machine deletes the stored data after sending Pano Common Document Nane 4 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or use Address Book from the display screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers 5 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to send a fax to destinations While the machine is sending a fax you cannot
405. wn on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options Scan and save your scanned images Macintosh scanning You can scan documents using Image Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with network 1 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Start Applications and click Image Capture For MAC OS X 10 4 10 5 Click Devices and click Browse Devices For MAC OS X 10 6 Select your device below SHARED Skip to step 6 For Mac OS X 10 4 Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect e fa warning message appears click Change Port to select port e If TWAIN UI appears from the Preference tab click Change Port to select port 4 Refer to Scan and Fax Manager for Change port use see Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager on page 107 For Mac OS X 10 5 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the Mac OS X10 4 steps above Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image
406. y An overlay is text and or images stored on the hard drive as a special file format that can be printed on any document You can store scanned forms on the hard drive as an overlay to apply to copy output When you use this option Booklet and Poster in the Advanced tab is inactivated Copies 0001 Advanced mage Watermark Overlay Stamp On Poster Copy Ouplex Scan Speed a 3 4 vV K X Cancel 1 Press Copy from the display screen Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more in the Basic tab see Changing the settings for each copy on page 54 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Overlay gt On from the display screen 5 Press the appropriate option Copies 0001 Advanced 3 Result s g T Watermark No Off Lead File Name a Date Overlay Stamp On Poster Copy csi Scan Overap 4 Back gt A 3 4194 New Detail Edit Delete OK Cancel V paaa CA a AAP seed 4 If the Overlay feature is set with the On Force mode from Machine Setup gt Application Settings gt Copy Settings gt Overlay by your administrator you cannot set and change all overlay options The overlay option the administrator set is applied Copying_ 71 to all copies Contact
407. y Check the addresses you want to delete and press Delete in Group Address Book Setting up an address book_ 136 printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e System requirements e Introducing useful software programs e Printer driver features e Basic printing e Opening printing preferences e Using help e Setting Device Options e Using special print features The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP System requirements e Using direct printing utility e Changing the default print settings e Setting your machine as a default machine e Printing to a file PRN e Macintosh printing e Linux printing e UNIX Printing e Windows Terminal Service is compatable with this machine Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems Requirement recommended OPERATING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Pentium Il 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2GB Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GHz 2 GB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1 GB Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GH
408. your machine has multiple fax lines Redial Term Redial Times i Back 3 Set the Redial Term 1 15 Min option using the up down arrows 4 Set the Redial Times 0 13 option using the up down arrows 5 Press OK to save the setting Faxing optional 114 Redialing the last number 1 AN 4 mg 8 Place the originals face up in the DADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DADF see Loading originals on page 35 Press Fax from the display screen Adjust the document settings in the Advanced or Image tab see Adjusting the document settings on page 119 Press the Basic tab Select Resolution see Changing the resolution on page 120 Press Recent Press the fax number you want to redial Then press OK 5 Result s Fax No Date 0544601 452 2009 12 12 14 05 103127741236 2009 12 12 14 03 8136547802632 2009 12 12 14 02 9234258702356 2009 12 12 14 01 v Itt AO NO Delete MO XK Cancel l4 e Add to Address Allows you to add a fax number in the Recent results to Address Book e Delete Allows you to delete a fax number in the Recent results Press the fax number you want to delete Then press Delete Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present K e When you
409. z 32 bit 1 GB 16 GB or 64 bit processor or 2 GB higher e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz x86 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 or 1 4 GHZ x64 2 GB R2 processors 2GHz or faster Macintosh Requirements recommended OPERATING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X e Intel 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 10 5 Processors e 867 MHZ or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X e Intel 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB 10 6 Processors Linux Item Requirements Operating RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit system Fedora Core 2 10 32 64bit SUSE Linux 9 1 32bit OpenSuSE 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 32 64bit Mandrake 10 0 10 1 32 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 8 10 32 64bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Debian 3 1 4 0 5 0 32 64bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2GB if e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software iH e Itis necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum Printing 137 UNIX XPS printer driver K e XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
410. ze of the originals from the Original Size 4 Select the size of paper to be printed in the tray from the Output Size 5 Select the Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document ar There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine They can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Printing 152 Using an existing watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK or Print until you exit the print window Creating a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 140 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Edit Watermarks Current Watermarks CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT TOP SECRET Watermark Message Font Attributes Nama Arial ba J First Page Only Style Regular v

Samsung SCX-8230NA multifunctional

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents